Operatin Instructions 22299017

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *22299017_1015*
Assembly and Operating

Instructions
Industrial Gear Units

X.. Series Helical and Bevel-Helical Gear Units
Torque Classes from 6.8 to 475 kNm
Edition 10/2015 22299017/EN

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
Contents
Contents
1 General information.................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 About this documentation ............................................................................................... 7
1.2 Structure of the safety notes ........................................................................................... 7
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty ............................................................................ 8
1.4 Exclusion of liability......................................................................................................... 9
1.5 Copyright notice .............................................................................................................. 9
2 Safety notes ............................................................................................................................ 10

2.1 Preliminary remark........................................................................................................ 10
2.2 General ......................................................................................................................... 10
2.3 Target group ................................................................................................................. 11
2.4 Designated use ............................................................................................................. 11
2.5 Other applicable documentation ................................................................................... 11
2.6 Safety symbols on the gear unit.................................................................................... 12
2.7 Safety symbols on the dimension sheet ....................................................................... 17
2.8 Symbols on the packaging............................................................................................ 18
2.9 Transport....................................................................................................................... 19
2.10 Storage and transport conditions .................................................................................. 28
3 Basic gear unit structure ....................................................................................................... 30

3.1 Nameplate..................................................................................................................... 30
3.2 Type designations......................................................................................................... 31
3.3 Mounting positions ........................................................................................................ 35
3.4 Mounting surfaces......................................................................................................... 37
3.5 Shaft positions .............................................................................................................. 38
3.6 Mounting positions and standard mounting surfaces.................................................... 39
3.7 Fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions ............................................................. 42
3.8 Corresponding directions of rotation ............................................................................. 47
3.9 Housing designs ........................................................................................................... 50
3.10 Combination overview of housing designs and options ............................................... 53
3.11 Gearing and shafts........................................................................................................ 55
3.12 Input and output shafts ................................................................................................. 56
3.13 Sealing systems............................................................................................................ 61
3.14 Coating and surface protection systems....................................................................... 65
3.15 Lubrication .................................................................................................................... 66
3.16 Accessories................................................................................................................... 67
4 Design of options and accessories ...................................................................................... 68

4.1 Oil expansion tank /ET.................................................................................................. 68
4.2 Shaft end pump /SEP ................................................................................................... 71
22299017/EN – 10/2015
4.3 Motor pump /ONP ......................................................................................................... 74

4.4 Torque arm /T ............................................................................................................... 74
4.5 Flange couplings with cylindrical interference fit /FC .................................................... 75
4.6 Mounting flange /F ........................................................................................................ 76
4.7 Backstop /BS ................................................................................................................ 77
4.8 Motor adapter /MA ........................................................................................................ 78
Assembly and Operating Instructions – X.. Series Helical and Bevel-Helical Gear Units 3
Contents
4.9 V-belt drives /VBD......................................................................................................... 79

4.10 Drive packages on a steel frame .................................................................................. 80
4.11 Cooling types ................................................................................................................ 82
4.12 Fan /FAN....................................................................................................................... 82
4.13 Water cooling cover /CCV............................................................................................. 85
4.14 Water cooling cartridge /CCT........................................................................................ 86
4.15 Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication /OWC ................................................................ 88
4.16 Oil-air cooler for splash lubrication /OAC...................................................................... 88
4.17 Oil-water cooler for pressure lubrication /OWP............................................................. 88
4.18 Oil-air cooler for pressure lubrication /OAP .................................................................. 88
4.19 Oil heater /OH ............................................................................................................... 89
4.20 Pressure switch /PS...................................................................................................... 89
4.21 Temperature sensor /PT100 ......................................................................................... 90
4.22 Temperature switch /NTB ............................................................................................. 90
4.23 Temperature switch /TSK ............................................................................................. 90
4.24 Diagnostic unit DUO10A (oil aging) .............................................................................. 91
5 Assembly/installation............................................................................................................. 92
5.1 Required tools/resources .............................................................................................. 92
5.2 Tolerances .................................................................................................................... 92
5.3 Important notes ............................................................................................................. 93
5.4 Requirements for assembly .......................................................................................... 95
5.5 Installing the gear unit................................................................................................... 96
5.6 Filling gear units with oil / delivered without oil fill (standard) ....................................... 99
5.7 Gear units delivered with oil fill (option) ...................................................................... 106
5.8 Gear unit with solid shaft............................................................................................. 107
5.9 Flange couplings with cylindrical interference fit /FC .................................................. 108
5.10 Flange couplings with keyway .................................................................................... 116
5.11 Output shaft as hollow shaft with keyed connection /..A............................................. 122
5.12 Output shaft as a hollow shaft with shrink disk /..H..................................................... 134
5.13 Output shaft as a splined hollow shaft /..V.................................................................. 149
5.14 Torque arm /T ............................................................................................................. 155
5.15 Mounting flange /F ...................................................................................................... 158
5.16 Couplings .................................................................................................................... 159
5.17 Motor adapter /MA ...................................................................................................... 161
5.18 V-belt drives /VBD....................................................................................................... 169
5.19 Base frame /BF ........................................................................................................... 183
5.20 Swing base /SB........................................................................................................... 183
5.21 Motor pump /ONP ....................................................................................................... 184
5.22 Fan /FAN..................................................................................................................... 184
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5.23 Water cooling cover /CCV........................................................................................... 184

5.24 Water cooling cartridge /CCT...................................................................................... 186
5.25 Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication /OWC .............................................................. 191
5.26 Oil-air cooler for splash lubrication /OAC.................................................................... 191
5.27 Oil-water cooler for pressure lubrication /OWP........................................................... 191
5.28 Oil-air cooler for pressure lubrication /OAP ................................................................ 191
5.29 Limit temperature for gear unit start............................................................................ 192
4 Assembly and Operating Instructions – X.. Series Helical and Bevel-Helical Gear Units
Contents
5.30 Oil heater .................................................................................................................... 194

5.31 Pressure switch /PS.................................................................................................... 203
5.32 Temperature sensor /PT100 ....................................................................................... 204
5.33 Temperature switch /NTB ........................................................................................... 205
5.34 Temperature switch /TSK ........................................................................................... 206
5.35 Oil filter........................................................................................................................ 207
5.36 Brake........................................................................................................................... 207
6 Startup ................................................................................................................................... 208

6.1 Important notes ........................................................................................................... 208
6.2 Shaft end pump /SEP ................................................................................................. 209
6.3 Motor pump /ONP ....................................................................................................... 209
6.6 Oil-water cooler with motor pump for splash lubrication /OWC .................................. 211
6.7 Oil-air cooler with motor pump for splash lubrication /OAC ........................................ 211
6.9 Oil-air cooler with motor pump for pressure lubrication /OAP..................................... 211
6.10 Oil heater /OH ............................................................................................................. 211
6.11 Backstop /BS .............................................................................................................. 212
6.12 Starting up the gear unit at low ambient temperatures ............................................... 213
6.13 Gear unit shutdown / gear unit conservation .............................................................. 213
7 Inspection/maintenance....................................................................................................... 215
7.1 Preliminary work regarding inspection and maintenance ........................................... 215
7.2 Inspection and maintenance intervals......................................................................... 216
7.3 Lubricant change intervals .......................................................................................... 219
7.4 Checking the oil level .................................................................................................. 220
7.5 Checking the oil consistency....................................................................................... 227
7.6 Changing the oil .......................................................................................................... 228
7.7 Checking and cleaning the breather ........................................................................... 233
7.8 Refilling sealing grease............................................................................................... 234
7.9 Relubricating the bearing for drywell sealing systems ................................................ 234
7.10 Motor pump /ONP ....................................................................................................... 236
7.11 Shaft end pump /SEP ................................................................................................. 237
7.12 Fan /FAN..................................................................................................................... 237
7.13 Axial fan ...................................................................................................................... 238
7.16 Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication /OWC .............................................................. 248
7.17 Oil-air cooler for splash lubrication /OAC.................................................................... 249
22299017/EN – 10/2015

7.19 Oil-air cooler for pressure lubrication /OAP ................................................................ 249
7.20 Oil heater /OH ............................................................................................................. 249
7.21 Split housing ............................................................................................................... 250
7.22 Oil filter........................................................................................................................ 250
8 Lubricants ............................................................................................................................. 252
Contents
8.1 Lubricant selection ...................................................................................................... 252

8.2 Lubricant table ............................................................................................................ 253
8.3 Horizontal housing /HH and universal housing /HU.................................................... 255
8.4 Thermal housing /HT .................................................................................................. 265
8.5 Agitator housing /HA ................................................................................................... 266
8.6 Sealing greases / rolling bearing greases................................................................... 267
9 Malfunctions/remedy............................................................................................................ 268
9.1 Troubleshooting information ....................................................................................... 268
9.2 Possible malfunctions/remedy .................................................................................... 269
9.3 Service ........................................................................................................................ 271
9.4 Waste disposal............................................................................................................ 271
10 Address list ........................................................................................................................... 272
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 283
22299017/EN – 10/2015
General information
About this documentation 1
1 General information
1.1 About this documentation
This documentation is an integral part of the product. The documentation is intended
for all employees who perform assembly, installation, startup, and service work on the
product.
Make sure this documentation is accessible and legible. Ensure that persons respons-
ible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the device in-
dependently have read through the documentation carefully and understood it. If you
are unclear about any of the information in this documentation or require further in-
formation, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
1.2 Structure of the safety notes

1.2.1 Meaning of signal words
The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety
notes.
Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded

DANGER Imminent hazard Severe or fatal injuries.
WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries.
CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries
NOTICE Possible damage to property Damage to the drive system or its
environment.
INFORMATION Useful information or tip: Simplifies
handling of the drive system.
1.2.2 Structure of section-related safety notes

Section-related safety notes do not apply to a specific action but to several actions
pertaining to one subject. The hazard symbols used either indicate a general hazard
or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a safety note for a specific section:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of hazard.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
• Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
1 General information
Rights to claim under limited warranty
Meaning of the hazard symbols

The hazard symbols in the safety notes have the following meaning:
Hazard symbol Meaning

General hazard
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage
Warning of hot surfaces
Warning of risk of crushing
Warning of suspended load
Warning of automatic restart
1.2.3 Structure of embedded safety notes

Embedded safety notes are directly integrated into the instructions just before the de-
scription of the dangerous action.
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:
• SIGNAL WORD Type and source of hazard.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
– Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty

Read the information in this documentation. This is essential for fault-free operation
and fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited warranty. Read the documentation
before you start working with the unit!
22299017/EN – 10/2015
General information
Exclusion of liability 1
1.4 Exclusion of liability
Read the information in this documentation, otherwise safe operation is impossible.
You must comply with the information contained in this documentation to achieve the
specified product characteristics and performance features. SEW‑EURODRIVE as-
sumes no liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting
from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such cases,
SEW‑EURODRIVE assumes no liability for defects.
1.5 Copyright notice

© 2015 SEW‑EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized reproduction, modification, distribution or any other use of the whole or
any part of this documentation is strictly prohibited.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
2 Safety notes
Preliminary remark
2 Safety notes
The following basic safety notes must be read carefully to prevent injury to persons
and damage to property. The user must ensure that the basic safety notes are read
and observed. Ensure that persons responsible for the machinery and its operation as
well as persons who work on the unit independently have read through the document-
ation carefully and understood it. If you are unclear about any of the information in this
documentation, or if you require further information, please contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
2.1 Preliminary remark

The following safety notes are primarily concerned with the use of gear units. If using
gearmotors, also refer to the safety notes for motors in the corresponding operating in-
structions.
Also observe the supplementary safety notes in the individual sections of these oper-
ating instructions.
2.2 General
WARNING
During operation, the gear units can have movable or rotating parts and hot sur-
faces.
Severe or fatal injuries.
• All work related to transportation, storage, setup/mounting, connection, startup,
maintenance and repair may only be carried out by qualified personnel, in strict
observance of:
– The relevant detailed operating instructions
– Warning and safety signs on the gear unit
– All other project planning documents, operating instructions and wiring dia-
grams related to the drive
– The specific regulations and requirements for the system
– National/regional regulations governing safety and the prevention of accidents
• Never install damaged products
• Report any damage to the shipping company immediately.
• Unauthorized removal of covers, improper use, or incorrect installation and oper-
ation may result in severe injury to persons, or damage to machinery.
Refer to the documentation for additional information.

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Safety notes
Target group 2
2.3 Target group
Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Qual-
ified personnel in this context are persons who are familiar with the setup, mechanical
installation, troubleshooting and maintenance for this product. Further, they are quali-
fied as follows:
• Training in mechanical engineering, e.g. as a mechanic or mechatronics technician
(final examinations must have been passed).
• They are familiar with these operating instructions.
Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately qualified electricians. Quali-
fied electricians in this context are persons who are familiar with the electronic installa-
tion, startup, troubleshooting and maintenance for this product. Further, they are quali-
fied as follows:
• Training in electrical engineering, e.g. as an electrician or mechatronics technician
(final examinations must have been passed).
• They are familiar with these operating instructions.
All work in the areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must be
carried out by persons who are trained appropriately.
All qualified personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing.
2.4 Designated use

The industrial gear units are gear units run by motors for industrial and commercial
systems. The units may only be run at the speeds and powers shown in the technical
data or on the nameplate. Implementing gear unit loads other than the permitted val-
ues or operating the gear units in areas of application other than industrial and com-
mercial systems is only permitted after consultation with SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Using these products in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited, unless spe-
cifically designated otherwise.
In compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, the X.. series industrial
gear units are components for installation in machinery and systems. In the scope of
the EC directive, you must not take the machinery into operation in the designated
fashion until you have established that the end product complies with the Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC.
2.5 Other applicable documentation

The following publications and documents should also be observed:
• "X.. Series Helical and Bevel-Helical Gear Units" catalog.
• Order documents, e.g. dimension sheet, order confirmation, etc.
• If required, the "Explosion-Proof AC Motors" operating instructions.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• Operating instructions of the options installed, if required.
2 Safety notes
Safety symbols on the gear unit
2.6 Safety symbols on the gear unit
CAUTION
Safety symbols or signs can become dirty or illegible over time.
Risk of injury due to illegible symbols.
• Always make sure that safety, warning, and operating notes are legible.
• Replace damaged safety symbols and signs.
The safety symbols on the gear unit must be observed. They have the following mean-
ing:
Safety symbols Meaning

Indicates the bleeder screw.
Indicates the oil dipstick.

Oil
Indicates the oil level glass.

Oil
Indicates the oil sight glass.

Oil
Indicates the oil filling location. Also serves as proper venting

Oil
during the oil change.
Indicates the oil drain.

Oil
Indicates the position of the breather. Serves to avoid mistaking

the oil measuring position for the venting position.
Indicates the positions for relubrication and makes it easier to

find the locations to be lubricated. Helps avoid bearing damage.
Indicates the water supply and serves to locate the connection

H 2O option.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Indicates the water return and serves to locate the connection

H 2O option.
Indicates the oil supply and serves to locate the connection op-
Oil tion.
Safety notes
Safety symbols on the gear unit 2
Indicates the oil return and serves to locate the connection op-
Oil tion.
Indicates the position of the temperature sensor/temperature

switch.
°C
Indicates the grease drain plug and serves to locate the grease
drain. Helps avoid bearing damage.
Helps avoid errors caused by lack of understanding. Read the in-

formation in the operating instructions.
For pivoted mounting positions, this symbol on the information

sign indicates the mounting position of the gear unit for checking
the oil.
Caution: Risk of burns caused by hot surface.
Caution: Removing the dipstick during operation may result in

damage to the gear unit.
STOP
Caution: Risk of burns due to hot gear oil.
Oil
22299017/EN – 10/2015
2 Safety notes
After startup, you may remove the following labels from the gear unit.
Meaning
The brake is not set at the factory.
VORSICHT NOTICE ATTENTION PRECAUCIÓN VOORZICHTIG OSTROŻNIE

DE Die Bremse ist ab Werk nicht EN The brake has not been set at
eingestellt. the factory
Mögliche Sachschäden! Potential damage to property!
• Bremse vor der Inbetriebnahme • Prior to startup, set the brake according
gemäß Betriebsanleitung einstellen to the operating instructions.
F ES
El freno no viene ajustado
Le frein n'est pas réglé d'usine de fábrica.
Risque de dommages matériels ! ¡Posibles daños materiales!
• Avant la mise en service, régler le frein • Antes de la puesta en marcha,
conformément aux instructions de la ajustar el freno según las
notice d'exploitation. instrucciones de funcionamiento.
X NL PL
De rem is niet af fabriek Hamulec nie jest ustawiony
ingesteld. fabrycznie.
Mogelijke materiële schade! Możliwe szkody materialne!
• Rem voor de inbedrijfstelling conform •
technische handleiding instellen.
18855199
9007204570571147
The coupling is supplied without grease.

DE EN
Kupplung wird ohne Fett geliefert. Coupling delivered without
grease
Mögliche Sachschäden!
Possible damage to property.
• Vor der Inbetriebnahme Kupplung
• Fill coupling with grease prior to startup.
mit Fett befüllen.
F ES
L’accouplement est livré sans El acoplamiento se suministra
graisse. sin grasa.
• Avant la mise en service, remplir • Llenar el acoplamiento con grasa
l’accouplement de graisse. antes de la puesta en marcha.
NL PL
Koppeling wordt zonder Sprzęgło jest dostarczane
vet geleverd. bez smaru.
• Koppeling vóór de inbedrijfstelling • Przed uruchomieniem należy
met vet vullen. wypełnić sprzęgło smarem.
18977405
9007204570573323
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Safety notes
2
Meaning
The coupling is supplied without oil.

DE EN
Kupplung wird ohne Öl geliefert. Coupling delivered without oil
Mögliche Sachschäden! Possible damage to property.
• Vor der Inbetriebnahme Kupplung • Fill coupling with oil prior to startup.
mit Öl befüllen.
F ES
L’accouplement est livré sans El acoplamiento se suministra
huile. sin aceite.
• Avant la mise en service, remplir • Llenar el acoplamiento con aceite antes
l
Oi l’accouplement d’huile. de la puesta en marcha.
NL PL
Koppeling wordt zonder Sprzęgło jest dostarczane
olie geleverd. bez oleju.
• Koppeling vóór de inbedrijfstelling • Przed uruchomieniem należy
met olie vullen. wypełnić sprzęgło olejem.
18977413
9007204571876363
The gear unit is protected against corrosion with VCI.

DE Getriebe ist mit VCI EN Gear unit with VCI corrosion
rostgeschützt. Nicht öffnen! protection. Do not open!
• Vor der Inbetriebnahme Vorarbeiten • Prior to startup, perform preliminary
gemäß Betriebsanleitung durchführen. work according to operating instructions
• Keine offene Flamme! • No open flames!
F Réducteur protégé contre la ES Reductor está protegido con VCI

corrosion avec VCI. Ne pas ouvrir contra la corrosión. ¡No abrir!
• Avant la mise en service, réaliser les • Antes de la puesta en marcha, efectuar
travaux préliminaires indiqués dans la los trabajos preparatorios según las
notice d'exploitation. instrucciones de funcionamiento.
• Pas de flammes ouvertes ! • No debe haber fuego abierto.
NL Tandwielkast is met VCI tegen PL
VCI corrosie beschermd. Niet openen!
• Vóór de inbedrijfstelling voor-
bereidingen conform technische
handleiding uitvoeren.
18977421 • Geen open vuur!
9007204570575499
22299017/EN – 10/2015
2 Safety notes
Meaning
Gear unit is supplied without oil.

DE EN
Getriebe wird ohne Öl geliefert. Gear unit is delivered without oil.
• Vor der Inbetriebnahme Ölbefüllung • Prior to startup, fill in oil according
gemäß Betriebsanleitung durchführen. to operating instructions.
F Le réducteur ne contient pas ES

El reductor se suministra
d'huile à la livraison. sin aceite.
Dommages matériels possibles ! ¡Posibles daños materiales!
• Avant la mise en service, effectuer le • Antes de la puesta en marcha,
remplissage d'huile conformément à la efectuar el llenado de aceite según
l notice d'exploitation.
Oi las instrucciones de funcionamiento.
NL PL
Tandwielkast wordt zonder Przekładnia jest dostarczana
olie geleverd. bez oleju.
Mogelijke materië schade! Możliwe szkody materialne!
• Vóór de inbedrijfstelling olie conform
technische handleiding bijvullen.
18977383
9007204570577675
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Safety notes
Safety symbols on the dimension sheet 2
2.7 Safety symbols on the dimension sheet
The safety symbols on the dimension sheet must be observed. They have the follow-
ing meaning:

Indicates the position of the oil dipstick.
Indicates the position of the oil level glass.
Indicates the position of the oil sight glass.
Indicates the oil filling location.
Indicates the oil drain.
Indicates the position of the breather.
Indicates the position of the relubrication point.
Indicates the position of the relubrication point.
Fett Indicates the position of the grease outlet.
G 1/4"
Indicates the water inflow with connection dimensions.
H2O
G 1/4"
Indicates the water return with connection dimensions.
H2O
OIL Indicates the oil inflow.
OIL
Indicates the oil return.
Indicates the position of the magnetic screw plug.

N S
Indicates the position of the inspection cover.
Indicates the position of the attachment points for transport.
Indicates the position of the torque arm.

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Indicates the position of the operator's vibration sensor with

connection dimensions.
M8
Indicates the position of the air outlet screw.
2 Safety notes
Symbols on the packaging

Indicates the position of the oil heater.
Indicates the oil level plug.
2.8 Symbols on the packaging

The symbols on the packaging must be observed. They have the following meaning:
Fragile Protect Fasten Hand hooks

from heat here prohibited
Up Keep dry Center of gravity

1811486091
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Safety notes
Transport 2
2.9 Transport
2.9.1 General information
WARNING
Suspended loads can fall.
• Do not stand under the suspended load.
• Secure the danger zone.
• Use suitable, sufficiently rated and undamaged handling equipment.
• Consider the gear unit dimensions, the center of gravity and the weight that has
to be moved when selecting lifting equipment or crane (see dimension drawing).
The weight to be moved is the total weight of the drive package including mount-
on components (not only the weight of the gear unit).
CAUTION
Risk of slipping of unsecured mount-on components, such as keys.
Potential risk of crushing due to falling parts.
• Secure the mount-on components.
CAUTION
Risk of slipping due to lubricant leaking from damaged seals.
Minor injuries.
• Check the gear unit and mount-on components for leaking lubricant.
NOTICE
Improper transport can damage the gear unit.
• Observe the following notes.
• Inspect the shipment for damage as soon as you receive the delivery. Inform the
shipping company immediately about any damage. It may be necessary to sus-
pend startup.
• The weight of the gear unit (without oil) is indicated on the nameplate or on the di-
mension sheet. Observe the loads and specifications given there.
• If possible, transport the gear unit without oil fill. If this is not possible, note that the
weight indicated on the nameplate refers only to the no-load weight of the gear
unit, and replace the breather with a screw plug.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• The gear unit must be transported in a manner that prevents damage to the gear
unit and to mount-on components. For example, impacts against exposed shaft
ends can damage the gear unit.
• Use only the prescribed suspension points [1] to transport the gear unit (see order
documents). The load suspensions of the motor or mount-on components are
provided for stabilization purposes only.
2 Safety notes
Transport
• The figures on the following pages are exemplary.

• Observe that the eyebolt are screwed in completely and must be flush to the con-
tact surface. Observe the following note.
Eyebolts DIN 580 / DIN 582

Correct: Incorrect:
Angle of tension force vector towards Tension away from the ring plane
the ring plane, max. 45°
45° 0° 45°
2.9.2 Universal housing /HU

The following figure illustrates examples on how to transport the gear unit.
[1]
[1] [1] [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
9007205300586251
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Safety notes
Transport 2
2.9.3 Horizontal housing /HH
The following figure illustrates examples on how to transport the gear unit.
Sizes X100 – 210
[1] [1]
[1] [1]
[1] [1]
[1] [1]
13315118219
Sizes X220 – 320
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
13319419787
2 Safety notes
Transport
2.9.4 Thermal housing /HT

The user is responsible for transport. For an example of the internal
SEW‑EURODRIVE plant specifications, refer to the following table. The values in the
table are only valid for transport with 4 attachment points [1] and without mount-on
components, such as swing base, base frame or external cooling systems.
Transport with 2 attachment points with eyebolts (DIN 580/DIN 582) is not permitted.
Eyebolts DIN 580/DIN 582
Size Thread
X220 – 230 4 x M24
X240 – 250 4 x M30
X260 – 280 4 x M30
X290 – 300 4 x M36
X310 – 320 4 x M36
The following figure illustrates how to transport the gear unit.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
15518374539
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Safety notes
Transport 2
2.9.5 Agitator housing /HA
The user is responsible for transport. For an example of the internal
SEW‑EURODRIVE plant specifications, refer to the following table. The values in the
table are only valid for transport with 4 attachment points [1] and without mount-on
components, such as external cooling systems.
Use star-shaped eyebolts [2] for the transport. Transport with eybolts according to
DIN 580 and DIN 582 is not permitted.
Transport with only 2 attachment points is not permitted.
Size Thread
X140 – 150 4 x M16
X160 – 170 4 x M20
X180 – 190 4 x M24
X200 – 210 4 x M24
The following figure illustrates how to transport the gear unit.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
15466449163
22299017/EN – 10/2015
2 Safety notes
Transport
2.9.6 Gear units with motor adapter

Gear units with motor adapter may only be transported using lifting cables/chains [2]
or lifting straps [1] at an angle from 90° (vertical) up to 70° from the horizontal. The
eyebolts on the motor must not be used for transport.
The following figures show a transportation example.
Universal and horizontal housing /HU/HH

Gear units with motor adapter may only be transported using lifting cables/chains [2]
or lifting straps [1] at an angle from 90° (vertical) up to 70° from the horizontal. The
eyebolts on the motor must not be used for transport. The following figures show a
transportation example.
90°-70°
[1] <70°
[1]
[2] [2] [2] [2]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
15582989195
Safety notes
Transport 2
Agitator housing /HA
Use only the prescribed suspension points [1] and star-shaped eyebolts [2] to trans-
port the gear unit. Transport with eybolts according to DIN 580 and DIN 582 is not per-
mitted.
The eyebolts [3] on the motor must not be used for transport. The following figures il-
lustrate how to transport the gear unit.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1] [1] [3]

22299017/EN – 10/2015
15466452491
2 Safety notes
Transport
2.9.7 Gear units with V-belt drive

Gear units with a V-belt drive must only be transported using lifting straps [1] and
cables [2] at an angle of 90° (vertical). The eyebolts on the motor must not be used for
transport.
[2]
[1]
90 [1] [2]
°
90
°
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
18014399489006731
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Safety notes
Transport 2
2.9.8 Gear units on swing base/base frame
Gear units on a swing base/base frame may only be transported using vertically ten-
sioned lifting cables [1] or chains.
[1]
[1] [1]
90
90
°
9007199436455563
22299017/EN – 10/2015
2 Safety notes
Storage and transport conditions
2.10 Storage and transport conditions

The gear units can be provided with the following protection and packaging types de-
pending on the storage and transport conditions.
2.10.1 Internal conservation
Standard corrosion protection

After the test run, the test oil fill is drained out of the gear unit. The remaining oil film
protects the gear unit against corrosion for a limited period of time. If specified in the
order, the gear unit can be delivered with oil. Refer to the order documents for more
information.
Long-term corrosion protection

After the test run, the test oil fill is drained out of the gear unit and the interior space is
filled with a vapor phase inhibitor. The breather is replaced by a screw plug and in-
cluded in the gear unit delivery.
Corrosion protection with VCI anti-corrosion agent is not permitted for gear units that
are operated with food grade lubricants. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE in such cases.
2.10.2 Exterior corrosion protection

The following measures are taken for exterior corrosion protection:
• Anti-corrosion agent is applied to bare, non-painted functional surfaces of shafts,
flanges, mounting and foot surfaces of the housing. The anti-corrosion agent must
be removed with a suitable solvent that does not damage the oil seal.
• Small spare parts and loose pieces, such as bolts, nuts, etc., are packed in corro-
sion protection plastic bags (VCI corrosion protection bags).
• Threaded holes and blind holes are covered by plastic plugs.
• If the gear unit is stored longer than 6 months, regularly check the protective coat-
ing of unpainted areas as well as the paint coating. Areas in which the protective
coating and/or painting has been damaged may have to be repainted.
2.10.3 Packaging
Standard packaging
The gear unit is delivered on a pallet, securely attached and without cover.
Use: Land transport
Long-term packaging
The gear unit is delivered in a wooden box that is also appropriate for sea transport.
Application: Sea transport and/or for long-term storage
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Safety notes
Storage and transport conditions 2
2.10.4 Storage conditions
NOTICE
Improper storage may result in damages to the gear unit.
• During storage up to startup, the gear unit must be stored in a shock-free manner
to prevent damage to the rolling bearing raceways.
• The output shaft must be rotated at least one full rotation every 6 months so that
the position of the rolling elements in the bearings of the input and output shafts
changes.
INFORMATION
The gear units are delivered without oil as standard; different protection systems are
required depending on the storage period and storage conditions as shown in the fol-
lowing table.
Corrosion protection Storage location Storage duration

+ packaging
Standard corrosion pro- Under roof and enclosed at constant temperature Max. 6 months with intact
tection and atmospheric humidity (5 °C < ϑ < 60 °C, surface protection.
+ < 50% relative humidity).
Standard packaging No sudden temperature fluctuations. Controlled

ventilation with filter (free from dust and dirt). No
aggressive vapors, no shocks.
Long-term corrosion Under roof and enclosed at constant temperature Max. 3 years with regular in-
protection and atmospheric humidity (5 °C < ϑ < 60 °C, spection and checking for in-
+ < 50% relative humidity). tactness.
Standard packaging No sudden temperature fluctuations. Controlled

ventilation of the storage location with filter (free
from dust and dirt). No aggressive vapors, no
shocks.
Long-term corrosion With roof, protected against rain and shocks. Max. 3 years with regular in-
protection spection and checking for in-
tactness.
+
Long-term packaging
INFORMATION
If stored in tropical zones, provide for sufficient protection against insect damage.
Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE for differing requirements.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
3 Basic gear unit structure
Nameplate
INFORMATION
The basic gear unit comprises: Gear units with mounted options, such as oil heater,
water cooling cover, water cooling cartridge, oil expansion tank, etc. The cooling sys-
tems OAC, OAP, OWC, OWP, ONP are not part of a basic gear unit.
3.1 Nameplate
The following example shows the structure of the nameplate. The oil quantity specified
on the nameplate refers only to the basic gear unit.
SEW-EURODRIVE
PK1
MK2 PM
Ta
M4-M1/9°
Made in Germany
2014
63050395201832459
Type Type designation

No. 1 Serial number
PK1 [kW] Operating power on the input shaft (HSS)
MK2 [Nm] Gear unit output torque
n1 [1/min] Input speed (HSS)
n2 [1/min] Output speed (LSS)
Norm. Normal operating point
Min. Minimum operating point
Max. Maximum operating point
i Exact gear unit ratio
FS Service factor
PMot [kW] Nominal motor power
Ta°C Deviation from standard temperature range (−20 °C to +40 °C)
Mass [kg] Weight of the gear unit
Qty of greasing points Number of regreasing points
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Fans Number of installed fans

Oil grade and viscosity class / oil quantity
Year Year of manufacture
IM Mounting position and mounting surface
Basic gear unit structure
Type designations 3
3.2 Type designations
3.2.1 Gear units
The following example shows the structure of the type designation:
X3KS250 /HU /B
X Industrial gear unit series
3 Number of gear unit stages
• 2 = 2 stages
• 3 = 3 stages
• 4 = 4 stages
K Gear unit variant
• F = Helical gear unit
• K = Bevel-helical gear unit
• T = Bevel-helical gear unit
S Type of output shaft
• S = Solid shaft with key
• R = Smooth solid shaft
• L = Splined solid shaft
• A = Hollow shaft with keyway
• H = Hollow shaft with shrink disk
• V = Splined hollow shaft
250 Gear unit sizes
• 100 – 320
HU Housing design
• HU = Universal housing
• HH = Horizontal housing
• HA = Agitator housing
• HT = Thermal housing
B Gear unit mounting
• /B = Foot
• /T = Torque arm
• /F = Flange
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Type designations
3.2.2 Oil supply systems

The gear unit can be equipped with an oil supply system for cooling and lubrication
purposes. The following example shows the structure of the type designation.
OWC020-00/M
O Oil supply system
W Cooling medium
• W = Water
• A = Air
• N= Motor pump
C Type
• C = Circulation cooling
• P = Pressure lubrication
020 Size
• 005 – 070
Application
-0 Mounting positions
• 0 = M1/M2/M3/M4
• 1 = M5/M6
0 Option
• 0 = 50 Hz
• 1 = 60 Hz
• 2 = 50 Hz / 60 Hz
• 9 = Special design
M Mounting type
• M = Mounted to the gear unit
• S = For separate installation
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Type designations 3
3.2.3 Flange couplings
The following example shows the structure of the type designation.
FC530/175SM
FC Rigid flange coupling
530 Outer diameter of the flange
175 Bore diameter
S Type of shaft-hub connection:
• S = Cylindrical interference fit
• K = Keyed connection
• T = Conical interference fit
M Type of centering:
• M = External centering
• F = Internal centering
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Type designations
3.2.4 Abbreviations for optional accessories

The table shows the abbreviations used and what they mean.
Abbreviation Meaning
BF Base frame
BS Backstop
APL Torque-limited backstop
CCV Water cooling cover
CCT Water cooling cartridge
F Mounting flange
FC Rigid flange coupling
FAN Fan
FAN-ADV Fan, Advanced design
ET Oil expansion tank
HH Horizontal housing
HU Universal housing
HA Agitator housing
HT Thermal housing
HSST Through-going input shaft
LSST Through-going output shaft
MA Motor adapter
SB Swing base
SEP Shaft end pump
T Torque arm
OAC Circulation cooling oil-air cooler with motor pump
OWC Circulation cooling oil-water cooler with motor pump
OAP Circulation cooling oil-air cooler with pressure lubrication and motor
pump
OWP Circulation cooling oil-water cooler with pressure lubrication and
motor pump
ONP Pressure lubrication and motor pump
OD Oil dipstick
DV Oil drain valve
OLG Oil level glass
OH Oil heater
22299017/EN – 10/2015
VBD V-belt drives

All options are part of the type designation except for mounting flange, torque arm, ho-
rizontal and universal housing.
Mounting positions 3
3.3 Mounting positions
The mounting position defines the spatial orientation of the gear unit housing and is
designated M1...M6.
The table below shows the mounting positions.
Standard mounting position Alternative mounting position
(marked in gray in the figure)
Horizontal gear unit M1 M3
Vertical gear unit M5 M6
Upright gear unit M4 M2
With the alternative mounting positions, there might be limitations regarding certain
options. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE in this case.
X.F.. helical gear units
M1
M6 M2
M4 M5
M3
M1
X.K.. bevel-helical gear units
M6 M2
M5
M4
22299017/EN – 10/2015
M3
18014399846530059
Mounting positions
Bevel-helical gear unit X.T..

Valid for sizes X100 – X210
M1
M6 M2
M4 M5
M3
M1
M6
M2
M4
M5
M3
18014401292607499
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Mounting surfaces 3
3.4 Mounting surfaces
The mounting surface is defined as the surface of a gear unit with
• foot mounting (X.... /B) or
• flange mounting (X.... /F),
on which the gear unit is mounted.
Six different mounting surfaces are defined (designation F1…F6).
F4
F1
F2
F5
F6
F3
9007199434620683
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Shaft positions
3.5 Shaft positions

The shaft positions (0 – 6) shown in the following figures apply to solid and hollow out-
put shafts. For other shaft positions or gear units with backstop, contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
3.5.1 X.F..
Shaft position X.FS.. Shaft position X.FH..
2 2
4 4
1
1
3 3
3.5.2 X.K..
Shaft position X.KS.. Shaft position X.KH..
0 0
4
4
3
3
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Mounting positions and standard mounting surfaces 3
3.5.3 X.T..
Sizes X100 to X210
Shaft position X.TS.. Shaft position X.TH../X.TA..
5 5
4 4
3
3
Sizes X220 to X320
Shaft position X.TS.. Shaft position X.TH../X.TA..

5
5
4
4
3.6 Mounting positions and standard mounting surfaces

A certain standard mounting surface is assigned to each mounting position:
INFORMATION
• The mounting position and/or mounting surface must not differ from the order.
• A deviation of ±1° is permitted.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• Other mounting surfaces are possible in combination with a certain mounting posi-
tion. Refer to the order-specific drawing.
Mounting positions and standard mounting surfaces
The following figure provides an overview of mounting positions and standard mount-
ing surfaces.
X.F.. M1
2
4 F1
M6
1 M2 F6
3 1
3 4
F3 2
3
2
4 1
M4
2
2 4 M5
F3
4 1
3 M3 1
4 3
F6
2
3
F2 1
M1
X.K.. 0
4 F1
M6
3 M2 F6
0
3 4
F3 3
0
0 M4 M5
4 0
F3
4
M3
4
3 3
F6
0 3
F2
27021599101969547
INFORMATION
22299017/EN – 10/2015
If you install the gear unit in mounting position M2, make sure that the customer's
mounting structure leaves enough room for the breather and the oil dipstick.
Mounting positions and standard mounting surfaces 3
X.T..
M1
M6 M2
M4 M5
M3
M1
M6
M2
M4
M5
M3
54043196953073291
INFORMATION
If you install the gear unit in mounting position M2, make sure that the customer's
mounting structure leaves enough room for the breather and the oil dipstick.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions
3.7 Fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions

Mounting positions deviating from the standard are differentiated between fixed and
variable pivoted mounting positions.
INFORMATION
• Fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions are only possible after consultation
with SEW‑EURODRIVE. Observe the order documents, such as the dimension
sheet.
• Fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions might involve restrictions concern-
ing accessories and technical data. Also, delivery times might be longer. Contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
M6
0° M2
M1
+
+
+
M4 +
M5
18014406531135115
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions 3
3.7.1 Fixed pivoted mounting position
Definition:
Gear units with fixed pivoted mounting position have a fixed mounting position that dif-
fers from the standard. This means the gear unit does not change its mounting posi-
tion during operation.
Example:
The type designation is set up as follows:
M1-M4/9°
M1 = Initial mounting position

M4 = Pivoting direction
9° = Fixed pivoting angle
Pivoted from mounting position M1 to M4 by 9°
This results in the following fixed pivoted mounting position:
0°
M2
M1
M1-M4/9°
+9° 0° M1
+
M4
+9°
8021658507
The oil level is checked in the selected fixed pivoted mounting position.
The fixed pivoted mounting position is shown on the nameplate as follows:
22299017/EN – 10/2015
M1-M4/9°/F1
Made in Germany
18014406531142155
3.7.2 Variable pivoted mounting position
Definition:
Gear units with variable pivoted mounting position can change the mounting position
variably during operation within the specified max./min. range.
Example:
The gear unit is operated in variable pivoted mounting position M1 to M6 = 9° and M1
to M5 = 12°.
0°
M6
0°
M1
-9° +12°
M5
8021663883
Step 1:
The largest pivoting angle determines the positive pivoting direction (12° > 9°). In this
example, this is 12° towards M5.
12° → from M1 to M5, pivoted by +12°
9° → from M1 to M5, pivoted by -9°
M6 0°
M1
-
+ M5
M1-M5/–9° M1-M5/12°
–9° M1 +12°
22299017/EN – 10/2015
8021665547
Fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions 3
The type designation for this example is:
M1-M5/–9°...12°
M1 = Initial mounting position

M5 = Pivoting direction
12° = pivoted from M1 to M5 by 12°
-9° = pivoted from M1 to M5 by –9° (= pivoted from M1 to M6 by 9°)
The variable pivoted mounting position is shown on the nameplate as follows:
M1-M5/-9...12°/F1
Made in Germany
18014406531150859
Step 2:
For variable pivoted mounting positions, the customer must determine the pivoting
angle in which the oil level is checked.
An additional nameplate is used to clearly indicate the oil check angle. This nameplate
lists the mounting position for the oil level check.
01.1807051010.0001.12
M1-M5/10°
1986 968 1DE
8021670539
22299017/EN – 10/2015
3.7.3 Combination of variable and fixed pivoted mounting positions

Fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions can be combined.
Example:
The following example shows a combination of fixed and variable pivoted mounting
position. The type designation is set up as follows:
M1-M4/9° (fixed pivoted mounting position) M1-M5/–9°...12° (variable pivoted mounting position)
M1 = Initial mounting position M1 = Initial mounting position

M4 = Pivoting direction M5 = Pivoting direction
9° = Fixed pivoting angle 12° = 12° from M1 to M5
-9° = –9° from M1 to M5 (= 9° from M1
to M6)
The variable and fixed pivoted mounting position is shown on the nameplate as fol-
lows:
M1-M4/9° M1-M5/-9...12°/F1
Made in Germany
18014406531158923
When combining fixed and variable pivoted mounting position, the customer must de-
termine the variable pivoting angle in which the oil level is checked. The fixed angle for
the oil level check is already defined.
The gear unit has an additional nameplate to ensure correct oil level checks. This
nameplate lists the mounting position for the oil level check.
In this example, the operator checks the oil level at M1-M4/9° M1-M5/10°.
01.1807051011.0001.12
M1-M4/9°
M1-M5/10°
1986 968 1DE
22299017/EN – 10/2015
8021678603
Corresponding directions of rotation 3
3.8 Corresponding directions of rotation
The gear unit can be operated in both directions of rotation. An exception are gear
units with backstop.
The following tables show the direction of rotation dependencies between input and
output shafts. The gear units as well as the position of the backstop are schematically
shown as the solid shaft version.
For the position and blocking direction of the backstop, refer to the order-specific doc-
umentation.
3.8.1 X.F..
Shaft 1)
14 23 13 241)
pos.
End gear
3 4 3 4
pos.
X2F...
X3F...
X4F...
Shaft 1)
pos. 134 243 1) 213 * 124 * 1234 * 1)
End gear
pos. 3 4 4 3 3
X2F...
X3F...
X4F...
22299017/EN – 10/2015
27021598122824075
= Position of the backstop

= Alternative backstop position (depending on size and gear ratio)
* = Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE when using a backstop
1) Note the restrictions regarding external forces on the LSS
Corresponding directions of rotation
3.8.2 X.K...
Standard
Shaft position 03 04 034 1) 043 1)
End gear pos. 4 3 3 4
X2K...
X3K...
X4K...
45035996982590603
Direction of rotation reversal

1) 1)
Shaft position 03 04
End gear pos. 3 4
X2K...
X3K...
X4K...
22299017/EN – 10/2015
27021598473116683

Corresponding directions of rotation 3
3.8.3 X.T...
Standard
1)
Shaft position 63 64 634 1) 643
X3T...
X4T...
Shaft position 53 54 534 1) 543 1)

X3T...
X4T...
27021600398028939
Direction of rotation reversal
1) 1) 1)
Shaft position 53 54 631) 64
X3T...
X4T...
22299017/EN – 10/2015
27021600398041867

Housing designs
3.9 Housing designs

The gear unit comes equipped with the following housing type:
3.9.1 Horizontal housing /HH

The horizontal housing is designed for mounting position M1. This housing design is
non-reversible.
Single-piece housing
The following figure shows an example of a single-piece housing for gear unit sizes
100 – 210:
9007208285647499
Two-piece housing
The following figure shows an example of a two-piece housing for gear unit sizes
220 – 320:
9453596299
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Housing designs 3
The universal housings can be installed in any mounting positions (M1 to M6). The
housings can be reversible if required.
Single-piece housing
The following figure shows an example of a single-piece housing for gear unit sizes
100 to 210:
9007207839154827
Two-piece housing
The following figure shows an example of a two-piece housing for gear unit sizes 220
to 320:
9007207839156491
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Housing designs

The thermal housing is designed for mounting position M1. This housing design is
non-reversible. Various measures make this gear unit suitable for increased thermal
requirements.
The following figure shows an example of a thermal housing for gear unit size 220:
9647807243

The agitator housing is designed as single-piece housing only for mounting position
M5 and sizes X3F140 – 210.
15466368139
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Combination overview of housing designs and options 3
3.10 Combination overview of housing designs and options
3.10.1 Horizontal housing /HH and universal housing /HU
Single-piece and two-piece gear unit housings for horizontal applications (HH) as well
as universal housings (HU) offer a wide range of possible variants. The following table
shows which options can be combined with horizontal housings (HH) and which can
be combined with universal housings (HU).
If options are installed later, it may lead to impairments. Not all options can be moun-
ted to the housing design. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Gear unit sizes

Abbreviation Options X100-X210 X220-X250 X260-X320
2F 2K 3F 3K 4F 4K 2F 2K 3F 3K 4F 4K 2F 3F 3K 4F 4K
/BF Base frame HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HU HH HH HH HH
/BS Backstop HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HU HH HH HH HH
/BSL Torque-limited backstop - - - HH - - - - - HH - - - - HH - -
/CCV Water cooling cover HU HU HH HH HU HU - - - - - - - - - - -
/CCT Water cooling cartridge HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/F Mounting flange HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU
/FC Rigid flange coupling HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HU HH HH HH HH
/FAN Fan HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/FAN-ADV Fan Advanced - - - HH - - - - - HH - - - - HH - -
/HSST Through-going input shaft HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/LSST Through-going output shaft HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/MA Motor adapter HU HU HH HH HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU
/SB Swing base HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/SEP Shaft end pump HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/T Torque arm HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/OAC Oil-air cooler HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/OWC Oil-water cooler HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/OAP Oil-air cooler HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/OWP Oil-water cooler HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/ONP Motor pump HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/OD Oil dipstick HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/ODV Oil drain valve HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/OH Oil heater HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/OLG Oil level glass HU HU HH HH HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/VBD V-belt drive HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU
/PT100 Temperature sensor HU HU HH HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/NTB Temperature switch HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/TSK Temperature switch HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/DUO10A Diagnostic unit HU HU HU HU HU HU HH HU HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
/EBD Extended bearing distance HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU HU
9007208900836363
Options are available in all gear unit sizes

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Options are not available in all gear unit sizes

HH Horizontal housing
HU Universal housing
Combination overview of housing designs and options

The thermal housing (HT) allows for a wide range of possible variants. The following
table shows the options that can be combined with the thermal housing (HT).
Abbreviation Options X3K180-320
/BF Base frame HT

/BS Backstop HT
/BSL Torque-limiting backstop HT
/FC Rigid flange coupling HT
/FAN Fan HT
/HSST Through-going input shaft HT
/LSST Through-going output shaft HT
/MA Motor adapter HT
/SB Swing base HT
/SEP Shaft end pump HT
/T Torque arm HT
/OD Oil dipstick HT
/ODV Oil drain valve HT
/OH Oil heater HT
/OLG Oil level glass HT
/VBD V-belt drive HT
/PT100 Temperature sensor HT
/NTB Temperature switch HT
/TSK Temperature switch HT
/DUO10A Diagnostic unit HT
/AP Breather HT
9648842763
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Gearing and shafts 3
The agitator housing (HA) allows for a wide range of possible variants. The following
table shows the options that can be combined with the agitator housing (HA).
Abbreviation Options X3F140-210
/BF Base frame HA

/BS Backstop HA
/BSL Torque-limited backstop HA
/CCT Water cooling cartridge HA
/F Mounting flange B5/B14 HA
/FC Rigid flange coupling HA
/Fan Axial fan in motor adapter HA
/MA Motor adapter HA
/SEP Shaft end pump HA
/OAC Oil-air cooler HA
/OWC Oil-water cooler HA
/OAP Oil-air cooler HA
/OWP Oil-water cooler HA
/OD Oil dipstick HA
/ODV Oil drain valve HA
/OH Oil heater HA
/OLG Oil level glass HA
/PT100 Temperature sensor HA
/NTB Temperature switch HA
/TSK Temperature switch HA
/DUO10A Diagnostic unit HA
Oil filter HA
/EBD EBD – Bearing for medium/excessive strain HA
15545451531
3.11 Gearing and shafts

The hardened and ground gearing is made from high-quality hardened steels. The
output shafts are made of tough quenched and tempered steel.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Input and output shafts
3.12 Input and output shafts

There are two types of shafts:
• High-speed shaft (HSS), usually an input shaft
• Low-speed shaft (LSS), usually an output shaft
X.F.. X.K.. X.T..
HSS
HSS
LSS LSS LSS

HSS
1395962891
3.12.1 Input shaft

The input shaft is provided with a closed keyway according to DIN 6885/T1 and a cen-
ter bore (according to DIN 332). The matching key according to DIN 6885/T1 - form A
is included in the delivery.
18014398833520651
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Input and output shafts 3
3.12.2 Output shaft as a solid shaft with key /..S
The output shaft is provided with a closed keyway according to DIN 6885/T1 and a
center bore (according to DIN 332). The delivery includes a key according to
DIN 6885/T1 – form B. The shaft has an insertion area with a reduced diameter to
simplify the mounting of output elements, such as a coupling hub.
9007199578978827
22299017/EN – 10/2015
3.12.3 Smooth output shaft /..R

The gear units are available with a smooth output shaft to install non-positive output
elements, such as flange couplings with a cylindrical interference fit. The face of the
shaft has a center bore according to DIN 332. The insertion area with reduced dia-
meter facilitates the mounting of output elements.
9007200756231819
3.12.4 Output shaft as a splined solid shaft /..L

The output shaft is splined according to DIN 5480. There is a centering in front of and
behind the splined shaft to improve the guide of the output element. 2 threads are
available on the front end of the shaft for mounting an end plate.
9007199999008011
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Input and output shafts 3
3.12.5 Output shaft as a hollow shaft with keyway /..A
The hollow shaft is equipped with a keyway according to DIN 6885/T1.
Included in the delivery:
End plate with retaining screws [1], or 2 retaining rings and protection guard [2].
[2]
[1]
9007199579038987
The protection cover is dust-proof. The standard sealing system is therefore normally
used on the side of the cover.
3.12.6 Output shaft as a hollow shaft with shrink disk /..H

The shrink disk is positioned on the side opposite to the machine shaft.
End plate with retaining screws [1], or 2 retaining rings, shrink disk [2], protection
cover [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
324304523
The protection cover is dust-proof. The standard sealing system is therefore normally
used on the side of the cover.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
3.12.7 Output shaft as a splined hollow shaft /..V

The output shaft is splined according to DIN 5480.
End plate with retaining screws [1], or 2 retaining rings and protection cover [2].
[2]
[1]
744271627
3.12.8 Gear unit mounting for hollow shaft gear units
NOTICE
Constraining forces can occur on the output shaft bearing due to the rigid connection
between the machine shaft and hollow shaft of the gear unit. This may result in dam-
ages to the output shaft bearing and increased fretting corrosion in the connection
between the machine and the hollow shaft of the gear unit.
• The gear unit is usually foot or flange-mounted and used as bearing point when
the machine shaft has no individual bearing or merely provides one bearing
point. You have to provide for an accurate coaxial alignment with the bearing
point.
• If the machine shaft has at least 2 bearing points, the gear unit should be con-
nected merely to the machine shaft and supported with a torque arm. In order to
prevent excess stress on the bearing, gear units with foot or flange mounting are
to be avoided.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Sealing systems 3
3.13 Sealing systems
3.13.1 Input shaft
Radial labyrinth seal
Dust-proof
Standard Dust-proof (Taconite)
Regreasable
Regreasable
Single oil seal with dust protection Single oil seal with Double oil seal with Single oil seal with
lip dust protection cover dust protection cover radial labyrinth seal
Normal environment Medium dust load High dust load Very high dust load with abrasive
with abrasive particles with abrasive particles particles
[1]
[1] [1] [1]
[1] Optional with oil seal sleeve
3.13.2 Output shaft

Radial labyrinth seal
Dust-proof
Standard Dust-proof (Taconite)
Regreasable
Regreasable
Single oil seal with dust protection Single oil seal with Double oil seal with Single oil seal with
lip dust protection cover dust protection cover radial labyrinth seal
Normal environment Medium dust load High dust load Very high dust load with abrasive
with abrasive particles with abrasive particles particles
[1] [1]
[1]
[1]
[1] Optional with oil seal sleeve

22299017/EN – 10/2015
INFORMATION
Make sure that the gear shaft is rotating during the regreasing process.
Sealing systems
3.13.3 Position of lubrication points
Universal housing HU / horizontal housing HH / thermal housing HT
Grease nipple on inspection cover

Regreasable sealing systems are usually equipped with taper greasing nipples ac-
cording to DIN 71412 A R1/8. Relubrication must be carried out at regular intervals.
The lubrication points are near the input and output shaft. Observe chapter "Mainten-
ance intervals" (→ 2 216).
Example
18014398833098379
Grease nipple on the top side of the gear unit

When installed in a restricted space, the lubrication points can be relocated to the top
side of the gear unit. Flat grease nipples according to DIN 3404 A G1/8 are used. Re-
lubrication must be carried out at regular intervals. Observe chapter "Maintenance in-
tervals" (→ 2 216).
Note the following points:
• This option is normally used on drives with fans, motor adapters, or V-belt drives.
• The option applies to both input and output shaft(s).
Example
22299017/EN – 10/2015
18014398833108107
Sealing systems 3
Agitator housing HA
Regreasable sealing systems are equipped with domed head lubricating nipples as
standard. Relubrication must be carried out at regular intervals. The lubrication point
[1] serves to lubricate the seal at the input end. The lubrication point [2] serves to lub-
ricate the seal at the output end. Observe chapter ""Maintenance inter-
vals"" (→ 2 216).
[1]
[2]
15644535179
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Sealing systems
3.13.4 Drywell sealing system

Vertical gear units with output shaft pointing downwards can be equipped with a Dry-
well sealing system in addition to the usual sealing. The lower bearing of the output
shaft is separated from the oil chamber by an integrated tube [1]. The bearing is
grease-lubricated and has to be relubricated at regular intervals (DIN 3404 A G1/8 flat
grease nipple). The oil level is lower than the upper end of the tube to prevent oil [2]
from leaking at this point. All gear units with pressure lubrication (shaft end pump or
motor pump) are equipped with Drywell sealing system to ensure sufficient lubrication
of the upper bearing and the gearing.
For the lubrication points of drywell sealing systems, refer to chapter ""Relubrication of
drywell sealing system bearings"" (→ 2 234).
[1]
[2]
9007199961031563
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Coating and surface protection systems 3
3.14 Coating and surface protection systems
Gear units are available with surface protection OS1, OS2, and OS3.
The following table gives an overview of coating and surface protection systems.
SEW design OS 1 OS 2 OS 3
Low Medium High
environmental pollution environmental pollution environmental pollution
Used as surface protection

under typical ambient condi-
tions
Corrosivity categories Suited for environments prone to Suited for environments with high Suitable for environments with
DIN EN ISO 12944-2 condensation and atmospheres humidity or moderate atmospheric high humidity and occasionally
with low humidity or contamina- contamination, such as applica- severe atmospheric and chemical
tion, such as outdoor applications tions outdoors subject to direct contamination. Occasionally acidic
under roof or with protection weathering. or caustic wet cleaning. Also for
devices, unheated buildings According to corrosivity category: applications in coastal areas with
where condensation can build up. C3 (moderate) moderate salt load.
According to corrosivity category: According to corrosivity category:
C2 (low) C4 (high)
Sample applications • Systems in saw mills • Applications in gravel plants • Port cranes
• Agitators and mixers • Cable cars • Sewage treatment plants
• Mining applications
Condensation test 120 h 120 h 240 h
ISO 6270
Salt spray test ISO 7253 – 240 h 480 h
Top coat color1) RAL 7031 RAL 7031 RAL 7031
Color according to RAL Yes Yes Yes
Uncoated parts, shaft end/ Water and hand perspiration repelling rust preventive applied at the factory for external preservation
flanges
1) Standard color
INFORMATION
Sheet metal parts (e.g. protection covers) are painted in RAL 1003.
Special surface protection is also available, please contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Lubrication
3.15 Lubrication
3.15.1 Lubrication types
Splash lubrication
The oil level is low; gearing and bearing parts that are not immersed in the oil bath are
lubricated by splashing oil. Standard lubrication type for horizontal mounting positions
(M1 or M3).
Bath lubrication
The gear unit is (almost) completely filled with oil; all gearing and bearing positions are
either completely or partly submerged in the oil bath.
• Standard lubrication type with oil expansion tank for:
– Pivoted mounting positions with horizontal gear units beyond a certain angle of
inclination (depending on type of gear unit, version and size)
– Vertical gear units (mounting position M5)
– Upright mounting position (M4) with X.K.. gear units
• Standard lubrication type without oil expansion tank for:
– Upright mounting position (M4) with X.F.. / X.T.. gear units
Pressure lubrication
The gear unit is equipped with a pump (shaft end pump or motor pump). The oil level
is low and might even be reduced when compared to splash lubrication. The gearing
and bearing parts that are not immersed in the oil bath are lubricated by oil through
lubrication lines.
Pressure lubrication is used when:
• Splash lubrication is not possible (see the relevant mounting positions and variants
under "oil bath lubrication").
• Instead of oil bath lubrication if it is not desired and/or is not thermally advantage-
ous.
• Drywell sealing system is required (only with a vertical output shaft with LSS facing
down).
• High input speeds are present and the maximum speed for the other types of lub-
rication is exceeded (dependent on the gear unit size, design, and number of
stages).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Accessories 3
3.16 Accessories
The following section describes the accessories for the several types of lubrication.
INFORMATION
The position of the accessory may vary depending on the gear unit version and the
gear unit size.
3.16.1 General accessories

The following figure shows the general accessories.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
2671413899
[1] Oil dipstick (optional) [3] Oil level glass

[2] Gear unit venting [4] Oil drain
Visual oil level check

The following types are available as standard for gear units in M1 mounting position
with splash lubrication:
• Oil dipstick for gear unit sizes X.100 – X.170
• Oil level glass for gear unit sizes X.180 – X.320
For other mounting positions and types of lubrication, the gear unit is equipped with an
oil dipstick as standard.
Gear unit venting

The purpose of a gear unit breather is to prevent that non-permitted pressure occurs
from heating during operation. The gear units are normally equipped with a high-qual-
ity breather filter with a filter mesh of 2 µm.
Oil drain
22299017/EN – 10/2015
The gear unit is equipped with an oil drain plug as standard. An oil drain valve may be
provided as option. This valve allows for a drain pipe to be easily attached when chan-
ging the gear unit oil.
4 Design of options and accessories
Oil expansion tank /ET

4.1 Oil expansion tank /ET
The oil expansion tank is designed to compensate for oil volume variations in the sys-
tem caused by temperature fluctuations. When the gear unit temperature increases,
the oil expansion tank absorbs some of the increasing oil volume and feeds it back to
the gear unit as the temperature goes down, which means the gear unit is always
completely filled with oil.
Based on the oil level specified by SEW‑EURODRIVE, the oil expansion tank is de-
signed to compensate the oil volume change within the permitted operating temperat-
ure range. A temperature decrease below the permitted range causes the oil expan-
sion tank to be completely emptied and air being sucked into the gear unit. This might
result in insufficient lubrication and a malfunction of the gear unit. An increase above
the permitted range causes an overfilling of the oil expansion tank and oil might leak
from the gear unit. During operation, any oil level below or above the level specified by
SEW‑EURODRIVE is permitted as long as there is oil in the expansion tank and the
oil expansion tank does not overflow.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Design of options and accessories
Oil expansion tank /ET 4
The following figure shows the accessories for mounting positions M1, M4 and M5.
Mounting position M5 [1] Mounting position M5
[1] [2]
[2]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
Mounting position M1 Mounting position M4 [2]
[4]
[1] [2] [4]
[3]
[3]
54043197057321483
[1] Gear unit venting [3] Oil drain

[2] Oil dipstick [4] Oil expansion tank
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil expansion tank /ET

The following figure shows an example of accessories for an agitator drive HA size
X140 – 210.
[1] [2] [4]
[3]
15485987211
[1] Gear unit venting

[2] Oil dipstick
[3] Oil drain
[4] Oil expansion tank
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Shaft end pump /SEP 4
4.2 Shaft end pump /SEP
The figure shows the shaft end pump in M5 mounting position as an example.
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
9007199962408331
[1] Shaft end pump

[2] Pressure switch
[3] Oil drain
[4] Gear unit venting
[5] Oil dipstick
In case of pressure lubrication, a direction-independent shaft end pump [1] supplies all
bearing points and gearing outside the oil sump with oil via a tube system.
The shaft end pump [1] is mounted externally to the gear unit and is driven by the in-
put shaft or intermediate shaft of the gear unit via a coupling. This ensures a high de-
gree of reliability of the pump functions.
The shaft end pump [1] is available in 5 different pump sizes. The adequate flow rate
for the specific application depends on the following factors:
• Required oil quantity for supplying lubrication points
• Position of the pump (connected with input shaft or intermediate shaft)
• Gear unit ratio
• Dimensioned for a speed of the gear unit
INFORMATION
• Proper functioning of the shaft end pump is monitored via the connected pressure
switch. Refer to chapter ""Pressure switch"" (→ 2 101) for information.
• Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE for information on the pump size selection.
• A minimum input speed is required for the shaft end pump to operate properly. If
22299017/EN – 10/2015
you use variable input speeds (e.g. inverter-controlled drives) or if you intend to
change the input speed of a gear unit equipped with a shaft end pump, it is essen-
tial that you contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Shaft end pump /SEP
4.2.1 Position of the shaft end pump
X.F..
With helical gear units, the shaft end pump is positioned opposite the input shaft.
Universal
housing /HU
9007199962489227
Agitator housing
/HA
[1]
15644674059
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X2K../X4K../X4T..
For X2K/X4K/X4T bevel-helical gear units, the shaft end pump is located opposite the
output shaft.
Universal hous-
ing /HU
5461376523
X3K../X3T..
Universal hous- For X3K/X3T gear units, the shaft end pump is located on the output shaft side.
ing /HU
9007200644569611
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Motor pump /ONP
4.3 Motor pump /ONP
INFORMATION
For descriptions on the unit structure, refer to the manufacturer's documentation and
the addendum to the operating instructions "Motor Pump /ONP".
4.4 Torque arm /T

A torque arm is available as option for shaft-mounted gear units to support the reac-
tion torque. The torque arm can bear tensile stress as well as thrust loads.
The length of the torque arm can be adjusted within a certain range.
The torque arm consists of a yoke with bolt [1], a threaded bolt [2], a maintenance-free
joint head [3], and a yoke plate with bolt [4]. The design using the joint head allows for
compensating assembly tolerances and operational displacements. Constraining
forces on the output shaft are avoided in this way.
0° ±1°
1°
[1]
[2]
-5 °
+5
°
°
90
[3]
[4]
9007199613867787
[1] Yoke with bolt

[2] Threaded bolt with nut
[3] Joint head
[4] Yoke plate with bolt
INFORMATION
Fan version X.K.. Advanced cannot be used together with a torque arm because the
fan guard is mounted to the attachment point of the torque arm.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Flange couplings with cylindrical interference fit /FC 4
4.5 Flange couplings with cylindrical interference fit /FC
NOTICE
Improper installation and assembly can damage the gear unit.
Possible damage to the gear unit.
• Gear units with rigid flange couplings cannot be additionally secured on the floor
with a rigid connection. This is why foot mounting of the gear unit or using a base
frame is not permitted.
Flange couplings [1] are rigid couplings for connecting 2 shafts [2].
They are suitable for operation in both directions of rotation, but cannot compensate
any shaft misalignments.
Torque between the shaft and the coupling is transmitted via a cylindrical interference
fit. Both coupling halves are mounted together at their flanges. The couplings are
equipped with several disassembly bores [3] for removing the interference fit hydraul-
ically.
[2] [1] [2]
[3]
36028797970832267
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Mounting flange /F
4.6 Mounting flange /F
INFORMATION
The mounting flange can be combined with all output shaft types but cannot be used
with the standard sealing system. Observe the limitations for hollow-shaft gear units
in chapter "Gear unit mounting for hollow shaft gear units""" (→ 2 60).
As an alternative to foot mounting, a mounting flange is available for gear units up to

size 210. The gear unit can be attached to the operator's machine via the following
two design types:
The mounting flange in B14 design has an outer centering and retaining threads.
In addition, a B5 design is available for the gear unit sizes X130 – 190. The mounting
flange is designed with through bores.
B14
B5
15632083083
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Backstop /BS 4
4.7 Backstop /BS
The purpose of a backstop is to prevent unwanted directions of rotation. During opera-
tion, the backstop permits rotation in only one specified direction of rotation.
The backstop functions by using centrifugal lift-off sprags. Once the lift-off speed is
reached, the sprags completely lift off from the contact surface of the outer ring. The
backstop is lubricated with gear oil.
[1]
[1]
CCW CW
199930635
The direction of rotation is specified as viewed onto the output shaft (LSS).
• CW = Clockwise rotation
• CCW = Counterclockwise rotation
The permitted direction of rotation [1] is indicated on the housing.
INFORMATION
If the drive has a continuous output shaft, the direction of rotation of the backstop
should be given as one views shaft position 3.
Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE for differing requirements.

Wear can occur on the backstop when operated below lift-off speed.
In the following cases always contact SEW‑EURODRIVE for specifying the mainten-
ance intervals:
• Input shaft speed rates n1 < 950 min-1
• or any of the following gear unit designs:
n1 [min-1] Size
X2K.. X3K../X3T.. X4K../X4T..
950 ... 1150 X2K100..230 iN ≥ 10 X100...130 all iN X120...190 all iN
X140...170 iN ≥ 31.5 X200...320 iN ≥ 200
X180...320 iN ≥ 50
1150 ... 1400 - X100...110 iN ≥ 25 X120...170 all iN
X120...130 iN ≥ 40 X180...320 iN ≥ 200
X140...170 iN ≥ 50
X180...320 iN ≥ 63
> 1400 - X100...130 iN ≥ 35.5 X120...130 all iN
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X140...170 iN ≥ 63 X140...250 iN ≥ 200
n1 = Input speed (HSS) iN = Nominal gear unit ratio
Motor adapter /MA
4.8 Motor adapter /MA

Motor adapters [1] are available for mounting
• IEC (B5) motors of sizes 100 – 355
• NEMA ("C" face) motors of sizes 182 – 449
INFORMATION
• The gear unit must be installed in such a way that no liquids can enter the motor
adapter (on HSS end) and accumulate there. Otherwise the oil seal can be dam-
aged, and subsequent damage can create a possible ignition source.
• An elastic claw coupling is included in the delivery of the motor adapter.
• All motor adapters can be equipped with a fan for 2- and 3-stage gear units.
The following figure shows an example of the motor adapter [1] connected to the gear
unit:
X.F..
[1]
[1]
X.K..
[1] X.T..
22299017/EN – 10/2015
1397425803
V-belt drives /VBD 4
4.9 V-belt drives /VBD
WARNING
Observe the maximum circumferential velocity according to the respective manufac-
turer specifications.
• Belt pulley may be destroyed due to excessive speed rates.
CAUTION
In standard design, V-belt drives cannot be combined with a mounting flange or a
fan, as these options would collide with each other.
V-belt drives are used wherever you need to adjust the total ratio or wherever the in-
stallation space requires a certain motor configuration.
The standard scope of delivery comprises motor scoop, belt pulleys, V-belt, and pro-
tective cover for the V-belt. As an alternative, the drive can be supplied as completely
mounted unit with motor.
The following figures show the basic structure of a gear unit with V-belt drive.
X.F.. X.K..
9007200207845387
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Drive packages on a steel frame
4.10 Drive packages on a steel frame

For gear units in a horizontal mounting position, complete pre-assembled drive pack-
ages on a steel frame (swing base or base frame) are available.
4.10.1 Swing base /SB

A swing base is a steel frame [1] that accommodates the gear unit, (hydro) coupling
and motor (and brake, if required), including protection devices, such as a guard, etc.
A swing base is normally used for:
• Hollow shaft gear units or
• solid shaft gear units with rigid flange coupling on the output shaft.
The steel frame [1] is supported by a torque arm [2].
Example: Swing base with coupling

[5] [4] [3]
[1]
[2]
216568971
[1] Swing base

[2] Torque arm (optional)
[3] Bevel-helical gear unit
[4] Coupling with protection cover
[5] Motor
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Drive packages on a steel frame 4
4.10.2 Base frame /BF
For gear units in a horizontal mounting position, complete pre-assembled drive pack-
ages on a base frame are available.
A base frame is a steel frame [1] that accommodates the gear unit, (hydro) coupling
and motor (and brake, if required), including protection devices, such as guards, etc.
The steel frame is supported by several foot mountings [2]. Such a frame is usually
used for solid shaft gear units with elastic coupling on the output shaft.
Example: Base frame with coupling

[5] [4] [3]
[1]
[2]
219858571
[1] Base frame

[2] Foot mounting
[3] Bevel-helical gear unit
[4] Coupling with protection cover
[5] Motor
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Cooling types
4.11 Cooling types

4.11.1 Fan cooling
A fan is installed on the gear unit input shaft. Its airflow improves the transmission of
heat from the gear unit surface to the environment. Refer to chapter "Fan" for further
information.
4.11.2 Built-in cooling

This refers to cooling systems installed directly in the gear unit housing or mounted
very close to it, e.g. a water cooling cover or a water cooling cartridge.
4.11.3 Circulation cooling

The gear unit oil is pumped out of the gear unit to an external heat exchanger by a
pump (motor pump or shaft end pump). This normally involves oil supply systems with
oil-water or oil-air heat exchangers.
4.12 Fan /FAN

A fan may be retrofitted to raise the thermal rating or when the ambient conditions
change after gear unit startup. The direction of rotation of the gear unit does not influ-
ence the operation of the fan.
The following fan designs are available:
4.12.1 X.F.. Fan (standard) /FAN

°
30
[1]
[1]
18014399183926283
[1] Air intake clearance

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Fan /FAN 4
4.12.2 X.K.. Fan (standard) /FAN
°
30
[1]
[1]
18014399183932043
4.12.3 X3K.. Advanced (option) /FAN-ADV

When the X3K.. Advanced design is used, the connection element (e.g. hydraulic
centrifugal coupling) can be mounted flush to the fan guard.
The air intake clearance is integrated into the fan guard.
30°
[1]
[1]
9007199929196427
INFORMATION
The X3K.. advanced fan cannot be used together with a torque arm because the fan
guard is mounted to the attachment point of the torque arm.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Fan /FAN
4.12.4 Axial fan

An axial fan [1] is integrated to increase the thermal rating. The fan depends on the
direction of rotation. This is the reason why fans are available for CW or CCW rotation.
Refer to the information on the order documents.
Universal housing HU / horizontal housing HH / thermal housing HT
[1]
15527273739

[1]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
15583854347
Water cooling cover /CCV 4
4.13 Water cooling cover /CCV
The water cooling cover is located on the assembly opening of the gear unit, and is
provided with cooling water through a water connection. The customer is to provide for
the water connection.
The amount of heat that can be dissipated depends on the intake temperature and the
flow rate of the cooling medium that flows through the unit. The data given in the tech-
nical specifications must be observed.
INFORMATION
Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if you use chemically aggressive cooling media, such as
brackish water or salt water.
4.13.1 Structure
[2] [1] [3]
9007199568481675
[1] Water cooling cover

[2] Supply
[3] Return
The water cooling cover [1] is made of a corrosion-resistant aluminum alloy. 2 bores
with pipe threads are available to connect to the cooling circuit.
• Sizes X100 – 130: G3/8"
• Sizes X180 – 210: G1/2"
The piping is not included in the delivery. Gear units with water cooling cover are de-
livered completely assembled.
A water cooling cover can be retrofitted. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
4.13.2 Notes on connection and operation

A cooling water volume flow (water inflow temperature 15 °C) depending on the gear
unit size is necessary according to the following table to achieve the thermal rating
given in the catalog. The cooling capacity of the water cooling cover changes when
the cooling water quantity or temperature changes or when specific cooling media are
22299017/EN – 10/2015
used. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if required.

Size Cooling water flow rate [l/min] Size Cooling water flow rate [l/min]
X100 – 110 4 X180 – 190 8
X120 – 130 5 X200 – 210 11
Water cooling cartridge /CCT
4.14 Water cooling cartridge /CCT

The water cooling cartridge is mounted in the gear unit's oil sump and is provided with
cooling water through a water connection. The customer is to provide for the water
connection.
The amount of heat that can be dissipated depends on the inlet temperature and the
flow rate of the cooling medium flowing through it. For the number of water cooling
cartridges, refer to the technical specification. The data given in the technical specific-
ations must be observed.
INFORMATION
Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if you use chemically aggressive cooling media, such as
brackish water or salt water.
4.14.1 Structure
[3] [4] [3] [4] [1] [2]
313751819
[1] Cooling pipes

[2] Tube plate with adapter piece
[3] Return
[4] Supply
The water cooling cartridge consists of 3 main parts:

• Cooling pipes (CuNi alloy)
• Tube plate (brass)
• Adapter piece (brass; gray cast iron; steel)
For connection to the cooling circuit, the following 2 bores with
• Pipe thread G1/4" for sizes X140 – 170
• Pipe thread G1/2" for sizes X180 – 320
are available. The piping is not included in the delivery.
Gear units with water cooling cartridge are delivered completely assembled.
Water cooling cartridges can be retrofitted to a certain extent. Contact
22299017/EN – 10/2015
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
INFORMATION
The cooling circuit must be connected in parallel for gear units with 2 water cooling
cartridges. Observe chapter ""Built-in cooling – water cooling cartridge"" (→ 2 186).
Water cooling cartridge /CCT 4
4.14.2 Notes on connection and operation
To achieve the thermal rating specified in the selection tables of the X.. Series Indus-
trial Gear Units catalog, different cooling water flow rates are required depending on
the size, mounting position, and lubrication type. The following table lists approximate
values for the flow rate for the M5 mounting position (water inflow temperature 15 °C).
Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE when using another cooling water flow rate, another cool-
ing water temperature, special cooling media (the cooling capacity of the water-cooling
cartridge changes), aggressive cooling media, such as brackish water or salt water.
The cooling water quantity has to be dimensioned individually for each cooling cart-
ridge.
Twice the cooling water volume flow is required for 2 cooling cartridges.
Size Cooling water volume flow [l/min] / per cooling cartridge Max. cooling water
2-stage 3-stage 4-stage volume flow
[l/min]
X140 – 150 10 8 3 15
X160 – 170 12 10 4
X180 – 190 16 13 5 28
X200 – 210 19 15 6
X220 – 230 23 19 8
X240 – 250 24 21 9
X260 – 270 17 16 6 25
X280 – 300 18 18 7
X310 – 320 22 22 9
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication /OWC
4.15 Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication /OWC
INFORMATION
the addendum to the operating instructions "Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication /
OWC".
4.16 Oil-air cooler for splash lubrication /OAC
INFORMATION
the addendum to the operating instructions "Oil-air cooler for splash lubrication /
OAC".
4.17 Oil-water cooler for pressure lubrication /OWP
INFORMATION
the addendum to the operating instructions "Oil-water cooler for pressure lubrication /
OWP".
4.18 Oil-air cooler for pressure lubrication /OAP
INFORMATION
the addendum to the operating instructions "Oil-air cooler for pressure lubrication /
OAP".
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater /OH 4
4.19 Oil heater /OH
An oil heater may be required to ensure lubrication during a cold gear unit startup
when the ambient temperature is low.
4.19.1 Structure
The oil heater consists of 2 basic parts:
1. Heating element in the oil sump ("oil heater") with connection unit
2. Thermostat with integrated temperature sensor
[2]
[1]
359104907
[1] Oil heater

[2] Thermostat with integrated temperature sensor
INFORMATION
The position of the thermostat varies depending on design and mounting position of
the gear unit.
4.20 Pressure switch /PS

The pressure switch indicates the correct oil pressure in the pressure pipe and in this
way indicates the operational readiness of pressure lubrication. The pressure switch
must be monitored by the operator.
During the starting phase of a gear unit with shaft end pump, pressure might build up
with a delay. The slow building up of pressure during this phase can cause the pres-
sure switch to issue a fault signal. You can prevent this by timing the pressure switch
to 5 seconds up to a maximum of 10 seconds.
Another switch-off delay is not permitted as this might damage the gear unit.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Temperature sensor /PT100
4.21 Temperature sensor /PT100

The temperature sensor PT100 can be used to measure the temperature of the oil in
the gear unit.
The temperature sensor is located in the oil sump of the gear unit. The exact position
depends on the gear unit type and shaft position.
4.22 Temperature switch /NTB

A temperature switch with preset switching temperatures of 70, 80, 90 or 100 °C is
used for monitoring the gear unit oil temperature.
For various functions, the temperature switch is also used as limit value switch, for ex-
ample
• as "early warning"
or
• as "main alarm" for switching off the main motor.
To guarantee a long service life and functioning under all conditions, it is recommen-
ded to use a relay in the power circuit instead of a direct connection through the tem-
perature switch.
The temperature switch is located in the oil sump of the gear unit. The exact position
depends on the gear unit type and shaft position.
4.23 Temperature switch /TSK

The TSK temperature switch is used with oil supply systems for circulation cooling. It
is provided with two fixed switching points (60 °C and 90 °C) for controlling and monit-
oring the system.
The temperature switch is integrated into the circuit of the oil supply system as follows:
• The cooling system is activated when the oil temperature reaches 60 °C.
• Warning signal or disconnection of the gear unit when the oil temperature exceeds
90 °C (usually a sign of malfunction in the oil supply system)
To guarantee a long service life and functioning under all conditions, it is recommen-
ded to use a relay in the power circuit instead of a direct connection through the tem-
perature switch.
The temperature switch is located in the oil sump of the gear unit. The exact position
depends on the gear unit design and shaft position.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Diagnostic unit DUO10A (oil aging) 4
4.24 Diagnostic unit DUO10A (oil aging)
If specified in the order, the gear unit can be equipped with a DUO10A diagnostic unit.
The DUO10A diagnostic unit is used for planning oil change intervals.
The diagnostic unit consists of a PT100 temperature sensor and an evaluation unit.
The temperature sensor installed in the gear unit measures the present gear unit oil
temperature. The diagnostic unit calculates the estimated remaining service life for the
gear unit oil based on the measured oil temperature. This calculated value is continu-
ously shown on the display of the evaluation unit; when needed, the display can be
changed to the current gear unit oil temperature.
INFORMATION
You find more information on the evaluation unit in the "DUO10A Diagnostic Unit"
manual, publication number 11473428.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5 Assembly/installation
Required tools/resources
5.1 Required tools/resources
Not included in the delivery:
• Set of wrenches
• Torque wrench
• Mounting device
• Compensation elements (shims, spacer rings), if necessary
• Fasteners for input and output elements
• Lubricant, e.g. NOCO® fluid from SEW‑EURODRIVE → except for hollow shaft
gear units
• For hollow shaft gear units → aids for mounting onto / removal from the machine
shaft
• Fasteners for the gear unit base
5.2 Tolerances
Observe the following tolerances.
5.2.1 Shaft end

Diameter tolerance according to DIN 748:
Ø = Smooth output shaft / ..R→ ISO v6
Ø = Output shaft as a solid shaft with key /..S → ISO m6
Center bores according to DIN 332, part 2 (type D..):
Ø > 16...21 mm → M6 Ø > 50...85 mm → M20

Ø > 21...24 mm → M8 Ø > 85...130 mm → M24
Ø > 24...30 mm → M10 Ø > 130...225 mm1) → M30
1)
Ø > 30...38 mm → M12 Ø > 225...320 mm → M36
1)
Ø > 38...50 mm → M16 Ø > 320...500 mm → M42
1) Dimensions not according to DIN 332; the thread depth including the counterbore is at least twice that
of the nominal thread diameter
Keys according to DIN 6885 (domed type)
5.2.2 Hollow shaft

Diameter tolerance:
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Ø → ISO H7 for hollow shafts for shrink disk

Ø → ISO H8 for hollow shafts with keyway
5.2.3 Mounting flange

Centering shoulder tolerance: ISO f7
Assembly/installation
Important notes 5
5.3 Important notes
Observe the following notes before you start installing/assembling the system.
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
• Work on the gear unit only when the machine is not in use. Secure the drive unit
against unintentional power-up. Attach an information sign near the ON switch to
warn that the gear unit is being worked on.
WARNING
A customer machine that is not appropriately secured can fall during gear unit in-
stallation or removal.
• Protect the operator’s machine against unintentional movement when installing
or removing the gear unit.
WARNING
Risk of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Serious injury.
• Let the gear unit cool down before you start working on it.
• Carefully remove the oil level plug and oil drain plug.
CAUTION
Danger due to unsecured mount-on components, such as keys.
Possible injury to persons due to falling parts.
• Install appropriate protective devices.
• Secure the mount-on components.
CAUTION
Risk of slipping due to lubricant leaking from damaged seals.
Minor injuries.
• Check the gear unit and mount-on components for leaking lubricant.
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to protruding parts.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Minor injuries.
• Gear units and mount-on components must not protrude into footways.
Important notes
NOTICE
• Make sure that the customer components are designed for the load.
• The gear units are delivered without oil fill as standard.
• Do not change the mounting position without prior consultation with
SEW‑EURODRIVE. The warranty will become void without prior consultation.
• The most important technical data is provided on the nameplate.
Additional data relevant for operation is available in drawings, on the order con-
firmation or any order-specific documentation.
• Do not modify the gear unit or the mount-on components without prior consultation
of SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Protect rotating drive parts, such as couplings, gears, or belt drives from contact
using suitable protection devices.
• Install/mount the gear unit only in the specified mounting position on a level, vibra-
tion-damping, and torsionally rigid support structure. Do not twist housing legs and
mounting flanges against each other.
• Make sure that the oil level plugs and oil drain plugs, as well as the breather filter
are freely accessible!
• When installing a filter in the OAP and OWP cooling units, make sure there is suffi-
cient height for removing the filter element and the filter hood.
• Use plastic inserts if there is a risk of electrochemical corrosion between the gear
unit and the driven machine (connection between different metals such as cast
iron and stainless steel). Likewise, fit the screws with plastic washers. Always
ground the gear unit housing.
• It is important that only authorized personnel is allowed to assemble gear head
units with motors and adapters. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Do not weld anywhere on the drive. Do not use the drive as a ground point for
welding work. Welding may destroy gearing components and bearings.
• Units installed outdoors must be protected from the sun. Suitable protective
devices are required, such as covers or roofs. Avoid heat build-up. The operator
must ensure that foreign objects do not impair the function of the gear unit (e.g.
falling objects or coverings).
• Protect the gear unit from direct cold air currents. Condensation may cause water
to accumulate in the oil.
• For use in damp areas or outdoors, the gear units can be supplied with a suitable
painting. Repair any damage to the paint work (e.g. on the breather filter).
• Do not modify the existing piping.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• For gear units that are filled with oil at the factory, check to see that the breather
filter is installed before you start up the gear unit.
• Strictly observe the safety notes in the individual chapters.
Requirements for assembly 5
5.4 Requirements for assembly
Check that the following conditions have been met:
• The information on the motor's nameplate must match the voltage supply system.
• The drive has not been damaged during transportation or storage.
• The ambient temperature matches the information in the order documents.
• No harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, radiation etc. in the vicinity.
• Clean the output shafts and flange surfaces thoroughly to ensure they are free of
anti-corrosion agents, contamination or similar. Use a standard solvent. Do not let
the solvent come into contact with the sealing lips of the oil seals as this might
damage the material.
5.4.1 Extended storage of gear units

Important: The service life of the lubricant in the bearings is reduced if the unit is
stored for ≥ 1 year (applies only to bearings with grease lubrication).
Replace the provided breather filter with the screw plug.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Installing the gear unit
5.5 Installing the gear unit

5.5.1 Tightening torques: Gear unit mounting of foot-mounted design
The following table shows the thread sizes and the tightening torques of the individual
gear unit sizes (foot mounting).
Size Screw/nut Tightening torque
Strength class 8.8
[Nm]
X100 – X110 M20 464
X120 – 130 M24 798
X140 – 150 M30 1597
X160 – 170 M36 2778
X180 – 190
X200 – 230 M42 3995
X240 – 280 M48 6022
X290 – 320 M56 9650
INFORMATION
The bolts must not be lubricated during assembly.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Installing the gear unit 5
5.5.2 Tightening torques: Retaining screws of gear unit mount-on parts
Observe the notes in chapter "Important notes" (→ 2 93).
Tighten the screws of gear unit mount-on parts and protection covers using the follow-
ing tightening torque.
INFORMATION
The tightening torques do not apply to mounting types such as rigid flange coupling,
torque arm, mounting flange, hollow shaft with shrink disk, etc. Those are described
in the individual chapters.
Screw/nut Tightening torque

Strength class 8.8
[Nm]
M6 11
M8 27
M10 54
M12 93
M14 148
M16 230
INFORMATION
5.5.3 Foundation
To ensure quick and successful gear unit mounting, the proper foundation should be
selected and the mounting carefully planned in advance. Foundation drawings with all
necessary construction and dimension details should be available.
When mounting the gear unit on a steel construction, ensure adequate rigidity to avoid
harmful vibrations and oscillations. The foundation must be dimensioned according to
the weight and torque of the gear unit, taking into account the forces acting on the
gear unit.
Tighten retaining screws or nuts to the specified torque. Use the screws and tightening
torques specified in chapter ""Gear unit mounting"" (→ 2 96).
NOTICE
An improper foundation may result in damage to the gear unit.
• The foundation must be level and flat; the gear unit may not be deformed when
tightening the retaining screws. Unevenness must be leveled out appropriately.
• Observe the weight specified on the nameplate.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Installing the gear unit
5.5.4 Aligning the shaft axis
WARNING
Shafts can break if the shaft axis is not aligned accurately.
• Refer to the separate operation instructions regarding the requirements of the
couplings.
The service life of the shafts, bearings and couplings depends on the precision of the
alignment of the shaft axes with each other.
Always try to achieve zero misalignment. When doing so, you should also consult the
special operating instructions regarding the requirements of the couplings, for ex-
ample.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Filling gear units with oil / delivered without oil fill (standard) 5
5.6 Filling gear units with oil / delivered without oil fill (standard)
The gear unit is delivered without oil fill as standard.
WARNING
NOTICE
Improper oil filling may cause damage to the gear unit.
• Fill the oil only when the gear unit is in the intended mounting position.
• Make sure the oil has ambient temperature when filling it into the gear unit.
• For gear units with external supply pipes, e.g. oil supply systems, establish the
connections prior to the filling process.
• Observe the additional notes depending on the lubrication type in the following
chapters.
• Fill the gear unit with the oil grade specified on the nameplate. The oil quantity
specified on the nameplate is an approximate quantity. The mark on the oil dipstick
or the oil level glass is the decisive indicator of the correct oil quantity. When the
gear unit is equipped with an oil dipstick and an oil sight glass, refer to the oil dip-
stick for the correct oil level. For additional information, refer to chapter ""Checking
the oil level"" (→ 2 220) and chapter ""Changing the oil"" (→ 2 228).
When additional attachments, e.g. an oil supply system, are mounted to the gear
unit, the oil fill quantity is higher. In this case, observe the respective SEW-
EURODRIVRE operating instructions "Oil Supply System".
• Use a funnel to fill the oil (max. filter mesh 25 µm).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Filling gear units with oil / delivered without oil fill (standard)
5.6.2 Gear units with oil expansion tank /ET

Observe the following conditions to make sure that the gear unit is properly filled with
oil:
• The temperature of the oil to be filled must generally be within a temperature range
of 10 °C and 40 °C.
• In addition, the oil viscosity must not exceed 3500 mm2/s during the filling process.
A higher minimum filling temperature might therefore be required depending on the
selected oil type. For guide values, refer to the following table.
min. oil filling temperature [°C]
Viscosity class mineral synthetic
ISO VG 220 10 10
ISO VG 320 10 10
ISO VG 460 15 10
ISO VG 680 20 15
NOTICE
An oil temperature outside the permitted range during the filling process may cause
oil deficiency or oil leakage during operation.
• Observe the oil temperature during the filling process.
NOTICE
An oil viscosity above the permitted level of 3500 mm2/s may result in inadequate
venting and an insufficient oil filling which could cause damage to the gear unit.
• Observe the oil viscosity during the filling process.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5.6.3 Gear units with shaft end pump /SEP
NOTICE
Improper installation and mounting of the shaft end pump [1] can damage the gear
unit.
• Fill the gear unit with the oil type and oil quantity corresponding to the nameplate
data, see chapter "Changing the oil" (→ 2 228).
• Before startup, fill the additional mount-on components (such as piping, cooler
matrix...) with oil on the pressure side. This ensures that sufficient oil is in the over-
all system during startup. The oil filling holes are marked in the order dimension
sheet.
• In case of a vertical mounting position and with the shaft end pump situated at the
bottom, e.g. for the housing HA, the shaft end pump must not be manually filled at
initial startup.
• Check the oil level using the oil dipstick or the oil level glass. For additional inform-
ation, refer to chapter "Checking the oil level" (→ 2 220).
• Directly before taking the gear unit into operation the first time, open the screw
plug [3] and fill the shaft end pump [1] completely with oil. After having filled in the
oil, close the screw plug [3].
This procedure must be repeated after an idling time of more than 6 months.
• Gear units with shaft end pump [1] are equipped with a pressure switch [2] for
function monitoring as standard. Connection has to be carried out by the customer.
Observe chapter "Pressure switch." (→ 2 203)
For further information, refer to chapter "Gear units with pressure lubrica-
tion" (→ 2 209) and the manufacturer's documentation.
In case of a vertical mounting position and with the shaft end pump situated at the bot-
tom, e.g. for mounting position M5/M6, the shaft end pump must not be manually filled
at initial startup.
The following figures show the gear units in mounting positions M1, M4 and M5 with
the corresponding screw plugs [3] and pressure switch [2].
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Mounting position M1
Size XF/XK160 – 320 Size X4T160 – 210
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
5186956299 5428635659
Size X4T220 – 250
[1]
[3]
[2]
5490776843
[1] Shaft end pump

[2] Pressure switch
[3] Screw plug
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Size XF/XK 120 – 140 Size XF/XK 160 – 320
[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2] [2]
5186958475 5380609803
Size X4T120 – 150 Size X4T160 – 210
[3] [3]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
5490662027
5432041867
Size X4T220 – 250
[3]
[1]
[2]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5490827019
[1] Shaft end pump [3] Screw plug

[2] Pressure switch
Universal housing /HU

If the shaft end pump [1] is mounted below the oil level, the pump need not be filled
with oil.
Size XF/XK120 – X320
[1]
[2]
9007204447566219
Size XF/XK 120 – 320
[3]
[1]
[2]
18014403702305035
[1] Shaft end pump

[2] Pressure switch
[3] Screw plug
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Sizes X3F140 – 210
[2]
[1]
15466378123
[1] Shaft end pump

[2] Pressure switch
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Gear units delivered with oil fill (option)
5.7 Gear units delivered with oil fill (option)

NOTICE
Improper startup can result in damage to the gear unit.
• It is important that gear units with shaft end pump, motor pump or customer-in-
stalled cooling system is vented before taking them into operation the first time.
For gear units that are delivered with oil fill, the breather must be installed prior to star-
tup. It is enclosed with the delivery.
The following figure serves as an example. The position of the breather is specified in
the order documents.
[1]
4688864907
1. Remove the closing plug.

2. Insert the breather [1].
3. Check the oil level. Observe the information in chapter "Checking the oil
level" (→ 2 220).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Gear unit with solid shaft 5
5.8 Gear unit with solid shaft
5.8.1 Mounting input and output components
NOTICE
Bearing, housings, or shafts may be damaged due to improper assembly.
• Always use a mounting device for installing input and output elements. Use the
threaded centering bore on the shaft end for positioning.
• Never force belt pulleys, couplings, pinions, etc. onto the shaft end by hitting
them with a hammer. This may damage the bearing, the housing and the shaft.
• If belt pulleys are used, make sure the belt is tensioned correctly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
The following figure shows a mounting device for installing couplings or hubs on gear
unit or motor shaft ends. It may be possible to dispense with the thrust bearing on the
mounting device.
[1] [4] FX1 FX1 [4]
[2]
[3] X1 X1
A B
12570941963
[1] Shaft end A Incorrect

[2] Thrust bearing B Correct
[3] Coupling hub
[4] Hub
To avoid impermissibly high overhung loads: Install gears or sprockets as shown in

figure B.
INFORMATION
Mounting is easier if you first apply lubricant to the output element and/or heat it up
briefly (to 80 ... 100 ˚C).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Flange couplings with cylindrical interference fit /FC
5.9 Flange couplings with cylindrical interference fit /FC
NOTICE
• Gear units with rigid flange couplings cannot be additionally secured on the floor
with a rigid connection. Foot mounting of the gear unit or using a base frame are
therefore not permitted.
5.9.1 Dimensions of the machine shaft
INFORMATION
Make sure the dimensions of the machine shaft correspond to SEW‑EURODRIVE
specifications.
9007200913100555
ø D35 ø D36 ø D37 FA K15 L DIN 332 D.M.. DIN 509
X..R100 85h9 85v6 90 2 9 131 M20 E2.5x0.4
X..R110 85h9 85v6 100 2 9 131 M20 E2.5x0.4
X..R120 115h9 115v6 120 2 9 165 M24 E2.5x0.4
X..R130 115h9 115v6 130 2 9 165 M24 E2.5x0.4
X..R140 135h9 135v6 140 3 11 202 M30 E2.5x0.4
X..R150 135h9 135v6 160 3 11 202 M30 E2.5x0.4
X..R160 165h9 165v6 170 2 11 222 M30 E2.5x0.4
X..R170 165h9 165v6 170 2 11 222 M30 E2.5x0.4
X..R180 175h9 175v6 180 3 14 253 M30 E2.5x0.4
X..R190 175h9 175v6 180 3 14 253 M30 E2.5x0.4
X..R200 195h9 195v6 200 3 14 283 M30 E2.5x0.4
X..R210 195h9 195v6 200 3 14 283 M30 E2.5x0.4
X..R220 235h9 235v6 240 3 14 298 M36 E2.5x0.4
X..R230 235h9 235v6 240 3 14 298 M36 E2.5x0.4
X..R240 275h9 275v6 280 4 14 318 M36 E2.5x0.4
X..R250 275h9 275v6 280 4 14 318 M36 E2.5x0.4
X..R260 275h9 275v6 280 4 14 318 M36 E2.5x0.4
X..R270 295h9 295v6 300 4 19 343 M36 E2.5x0.4
X..R280 295h9 295v6 300 4 19 343 M36 E2.5x0.4
X..R290 315h9 315v6 320 4 19 373 M36 E2.5x0.4
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X..R300 315h9 315v6 320 4 19 373 M36 E2.5x0.4

X..R310 355h9 355v6 360 4 19 413 M42 E2.5x0.4
X..R320 355h9 355v6 360 4 19 413 M42 E2.5x0.4
5.9.2 Mounting the coupling onto the machine shaft
1. Clean the shaft and bore of the rigid flange coupling thoroughly and remove any
grease. The disassembly bores of the coupling must also be free from dirt.
NOTICE
Improper mounting may result in damage to the coupling.
• Make sure that the shaft and bore are completely free from grease to ensure
proper functioning of the interference fit. Do not use assembly paste during as-
sembly.
2. Heat the rigid flange coupling to a joining temperature of 230 °C as long as no spe-
cial joining temperature is specified for the order.
NOTICE
The required assembly clearance is achieved only by heating the coupling.
Risk of burns during the entire assembly process.
• Make sure that hot parts cannot be touched unintentionally.
NOTICE
Radiant heat from the rigid flange coupling can damage adjacent elements.
• Protect adjacent elements (e.g. oil seals) with suitable heat shields.
1153862283
3. Mount the rigid flange coupling quickly onto the shaft up against the shaft
shoulder.
INFORMATION
Prepare mounting tools and plan the process carefully so that the coupling can be fit-
ted to the shaft quickly. During the cooling process, the coupling must be secured on
the shaft.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
INFORMATION
Once the coupling has cooled down, spray the disassembly bores with clean mineral
oil and close them using the supplied screw plugs.
1153865867
5.9.3 Mounting the flange connection

NOTICE
• Note that the rigid flange coupling cannot compensate shaft misalignments.
1. Clean the flange surfaces [1] of the coupling halves [2].

[2]
[1]
992697355
2. Align the bore patterns of the two coupling halves [2] and join the rigid flange coup-
ling.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[2]
9007200247441547
3. Mount the bolts [3] and tighten them in diametrically opposite sequence with the
tightening torques given in the following table.
INFORMATION
Do not lubricate the bolts [3] during assembly.
16 1 9
8 5
15 10
4 3
14 11
6 7
13 2 12
1 2
16
15 3
14 4
[6]
13 5
12 6
11 7
10 9 8
9007200247444747
Size Screw size Tightening torque

Strength class 10.9 [Nm]
X100 – 110 M20 661
X120 – 130 M24 1136
X140 – 150 M30 2274
X160 – 170
M36 3957
X180 – 190
X200 – 230 M42 5610
X240-280 M48 8475
X290-320 M56 13583
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5.9.4 Removing the coupling from the shaft

Notes
CAUTION
Risk of trapping and crushing due to improper disassembly of heavy components.
Risk of injury.
• Disassemble the rigid flange coupling properly.
• Observe the following instructions for disassembly.
NOTICE
Improper disassembly may damage the output shaft bearing.
• Do not apply any tools between the coupling and the gear unit housing.
To remove the coupling [1], the interference fit must first be widened hydraulically. The
remaining holding force must then be overcome with a pull-off device [2]. The follow-
ing figure shows an exemplary design of a hydraulic puller.
[1]
[2]
1071755147
For disassembling the coupling, one oil pump is required per disassembly bore.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
The data required for the extractor dimensioning is listed in the following table.
Size Oil pressure required for Number of disassembly Connection thread of the Required axial force of the
disassembly bores/number of pressure oil bores in the ri- extractor
[bar] required oil pumps gid flange coupling [kN]
X100 – 110 2 85
X120 – 130 2 115
X140 – 150 2 160
X160 – 170 2 190
X180 – 190 3 220
X200 – 210 1600 3 G 1/4" 280
X220 – 230 3 360
X240 – 260 3 420
X270 – 280 3 490
X290 – 300 3 550
X310 – 320 3 670
Procedure
1. Loosen the bolts [1] and separate the rigid flange coupling. Remove the screw
plugs [2] of the disassembly bores.
INFORMATION
Prepare disassembly tools and the process carefully, so that the rigid flange coupling
can be removed from the shaft quickly.
[2]
[1]
9007200360563851
2. Connect the first oil pump [3] to the disassembly bore closest to the flange [4] and
apply pressure until oil comes out of the second disassembly bore [5]. Depending
on the size, this bore can also be located on the flange surface of the coupling.
INFORMATION
It is essential that you observe the manufacturers' safety notes of the hydraulic
devices during the disassembly process.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[3]
[4]
[4]
[5]
9007200255373323
3. Connect the next oil pump [6] to this bore [5] and press in oil until it comes out at
the next disassembly bore [7].
[7]
[6]
[5]
1002542475
4. Repeat this process until all disassembly bores are connected to an oil pump and
pressure is applied. At the last disassembly bore [7], the pressure must be in-
creased until at both front faces of the coupling [8] oil comes out in the shape of a
ring.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
INFORMATION
The coupling can also be disassembled with only one oil pump. In this case, the indi-
vidual disassembly bores must be blocked after pressure has been applied. Provide
for a consistent pressure throughout the disassembly procedure.
INFORMATION
Before removing the coupling, keep the oil pressure constant for approximately 30
minutes to create an evenly distributed oil film inside the interference fit. The pres-
sure must be kept constant at all bores throughout this time and the remaining disas-
sembly process.
[7]
[8]
1002549387
5. Install the extractor [3]. Remove the coupling from the shaft. Since the oil pressure
breaks down after the last disassembly bore has been reached, the required force
for removing the coupling is significantly higher at the end.
[3]
[4]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
1000624651
6. Check the condition of the shaft and the coupling bore after the disassembly pro-
cess. Damaged parts must be replaced.
Flange couplings with keyway
5.10 Flange couplings with keyway

INFORMATION
specifications.
5.10.2 Mounting the coupling onto the machine shaft

NOTICE
• Make sure that the shaft and bore are completely free from grease to ensure
proper functioning of the interference fit / keyed connection. Do not use assembly
paste during assembly.
1. Clean the shaft and bore of the rigid flange coupling thoroughly and remove any
grease.
2. Heat the flange coupling half [1] to a joining temperature of 130 °C, as long as no
special joining temperature is specified for the order.
CAUTION
The required assembly clearance is achieved only by heating the coupling.
Risk of burns during the entire assembly process.
• Make sure that hot parts cannot be touched unintentionally.
NOTICE
Radiant heat from the flange coupling half [1] can damage adjacent elements.
• Protect adjacent elements (e.g. oil seals) with suitable heat shields.
[1]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
4349544459
3. Mount the flange coupling half [1] quickly onto the gear unit shaft all the way to the
gear shaft [2].
Flange couplings with keyway 5
INFORMATION
Prepare mounting tools and plan the process carefully so that the coupling can be fit-
ted to the shaft quickly. During the cooling process, the coupling must be secured on
the shaft.
[1]
[2]
4355233675
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5.10.3 Mounting the flange connection

NOTICE
Improper assembly may damage the rigid flange coupling.
• Note that the rigid flange coupling cannot compensate shaft misalignments.
1. Clean the flange surfaces [1] of the flange coupling halves [2].
[2]
[1]
4349540107
2. Mount the end plate [3] to the gear shaft [5] with screws [4].
[3]
[4]
[5]
4364607755
22299017/EN – 10/2015
3. Align the bore patterns of the two rigid flange coupling halves [2] and join the
flange coupling.
[2]
9007200247441547
4. Mount the bolts [6] and tighten them in diametrically opposite sequence with the
tightening torques given in the following table.
INFORMATION
16 1 9
8 5
15 10
4 3
14 11
6 7
13 2 12
1 2
16
15 3
14 4
[6]
13 5
12 6
11 7
10 9 8
9007200247444747
Size Screw size Tightening torque

Strength class 10.9 [Nm]
X100 – 110 M20 661
X120 – 130 M24 1136
X140 – 150 M30 2274
X160 – 170
22299017/EN – 10/2015
M36 3957
X180 – 190
X200 – 230 M42 5610
X240 – 280 M48 8475
X290 – 320 M56 13583
5.10.4 Removing the coupling from the shaft

CAUTION
Risk of trapping and crushing due to improper disassembly of heavy components.
Risk of injury.
• Disassemble the rigid flange coupling properly.
• Observe the following instructions for disassembly.
NOTICE
Improper disassembly may damage the output shaft bearing.
• Do not apply any tools between the coupling and the gear unit housing.
1. Loosen the screws [6] and separate the rigid flange coupling [2].
INFORMATION
Prepare disassembly tools and the process carefully, so that the rigid flange coupling
can be removed from the shaft quickly.
[6]
[2]
9007203604287627
2. Loosen the screws [4] and remove the end plate [3] from the gear shaft [5].
[3]
[4]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[5]
4364607755
3. Install the extractor [7]. Remove the flange coupling half [2] from the shaft [5].
[2] [5]
[7]
9007203604283275
4. Check the condition of the shaft and the rigid flange coupling after the disassembly
process. Damaged parts must be replaced.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Output shaft as hollow shaft with keyed connection /..A
5.11 Output shaft as hollow shaft with keyed connection /..A

The material of the machine shaft as well as the keyed connection should be dimen-
sioned by the customer according to the loads that will occur. The shaft material
should have a yield point of at least 320 N/mm2.
The minimum key length given in the dimension sheet (see next page) must be ob-
served. If a longer key is used, it should be aligned symmetrically to the hollow shaft.
With a continuous machine shaft or axial forces, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends that
the machine shaft be designed with a contact shoulder. It should be secured with a
suitable threadlocker to prevent the retaining screw of the machine shaft from loosen-
ing in the case of a reversing load direction. If necessary, two eccentric retaining
screws may be used.
5.11.2 Thread sizes / tightening torques

SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends the following thread sizes and tightening torques:
Recommended thread size
Ejector screw [8] Threaded rod [2] Tightening torque [Nm]
Size (threads in the end plate)1) nut (DIN 934) [5] retaining screw [6]
retaining screw [6] strength class 8.81)
strength class 8.81)
X..A100 M24 M20 464
X..A110 – 150 M30 M24 798
X..A160 – 230 M36 M30 1597
X..A240 – 300 M42 M36 2778
X..A310 – 320 M48 M42 3995
1) see the following pages
Thread size for Tightening torque

6 x retaining screw [3] 2 x retaining rings
Size Assembly/operat-
strength class 10.91) Disassembly [Nm] (bore) DIN 472
ing state [Nm]
X..A100 - - - 75x2.5
X..A110 - - - 85x2.5
X..A120 - - - 95x3
X..A130 - - - 105x4
X..A140 - - - 115x4
X..A150 - - - 125x4
X..A160 - - - 135x4
X..A170 – 190 M10x30 48 Apply hand pressure -
1) see following pages
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Output shaft as hollow shaft with keyed connection /..A 5
X.F/X.K C1 C2 ø D2 ø D14 ø D15 FA K1 K2 K3 L14 N OA Rmax. S6 T2 T3 U2 U3 DIN 33

X.T 2
D.M..
X..A100 25 12 75H8 75h11 75js7 2 312 47.5 81 90 205 173 1.6 M24 80.4 80 20JS9 20h9 M20
X..A110 30 14 85H8 85h11 85js7 2 312.5 45 84 100 210 176 1.6 M24 90.4 90 22JS9 22h9 M20
X..A120 30 14 95H8 95h11 95js7 2 342 53 92 140 244.5 190.5 1.6 M30 100.4 100 25JS9 25h9 M24
X..A130 30 14 105H8 105h11 105js7 2 347 68 109 160 258 194 1.6 M30 111.4 111 28JS9 28h9 M24
X..A140 30 14 115H8 115h11 115js7 2 403 61 102 200 306 222 1.6 M30 122.4 122 32JS9 32h9 M24
X..A150 30 14 125H8 125h11 125js7 3 408 76 117 200 308.5 224.5 1.6 M30 132.4 132 32JS9 32h9 M24
X..A160 36 16 135H8 135h11 135js7 3 465 80 127 250 361 256 1.6 M36 143.4 143 36JS9 36h9 M30
X..A170 36 17 150H8 150h11 150js7 3 493 96 115 280 377 256 1.6 M36 158.4 158 36JS9 36h9 M30
X..A180 36 17 165H8 165h11 165js7 3 565 109 128 300 423 292 2 M36 174.4 174 40JS9 40h9 M30
X..A190 36 17 165H8 165h11 165js7 3 565 109 128 300 423 292 2 M36 174.4 174 40JS9 40h9 M30
X..A200 36 17 180H8 180h11 180js7 3 620 130 149 320 460.5 319.5 2 M36 190.4 190 45JS9 45h9 M30
X..A210 36 17 190H8 190h11 190js7 3 620 130 149 320 460.5 319.5 2 M36 200.4 200 45JS9 45h9 M30
X..A220 36 17 210H8 210h11 210js7 3 686 133 152 370 518.5 352.5 2.5 M36 221.4 221 50JS9 50h9 M30
X2KA220 36 17 210H8 210h11 210js7 3 756 133 152 370 554 388 2.5 M36 221.4 221 50JS9 50h9 M30
X..A230 36 17 210H8 210h11 210js7 3 686 133 152 370 518.5 352.5 2.5 M36 221.4 221 50JS9 50h9 M30
X2KA230 36 17 210H8 210h11 210js7 3 756 133 152 370 554 388 2.5 M36 221.4 221 50JS9 50h9 M30
X..A240 45 22 230H8 230h11 230js7 3 778 147 170 370 562.5 400.5 2.5 M42 241.4 241 50JS9 50h9 M36
X2KA240 45 22 230H8 230h11 230js7 3 853 147 170 370 600 438 2.5 M42 241.4 241 50JS9 50h9 M36
X..A250 45 22 240H8 240h11 240js7 3 778 147 170 370 562.5 400.5 2.5 M42 252.4 252 56JS9 56h9 M36
X2KA250 45 22 240H8 240h11 240js7 3 853 147 170 370 600 438 2.5 M42 252.4 252 56JS9 56h9 M36
X..A260 45 22 240H8 240h11 240js7 3 851 143 166 450 639 437 2.5 M42 252.4 252 56JS9 56h9 M36
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X..A270 45 22 275H8 275h11 275js7 4 877 158 181 450 652 450 5 M42 287.4 287 63JS9 63h9 M36
X..A280 45 22 275H8 275h11 275js7 4 877 158 181 500 677 450 5 M42 287.4 287 63JS9 63h9 M36
X..A290 45 22 290H8 290h11 290js7 4 961 160 183 500 719 492 5 M42 302.4 302 63JS9 63h9 M36
X..A300 45 22 290H8 290h11 290js7 4 961 160 183 500 719 492 5 M42 302.4 302 63JS9 63h9 M36
X..A310 55 28 320H8 320h11 320js7 4 1030 170 197 560 781.5 528.5 5 M42 334.4 334 70JS9 70h9 M36
X..A320 55 28 320H8 320h11 320js7 4 1030 170 197 560 781.5 528.5 5 M42 334.4 334 70JS9 70h9 M36
5.11.4 Mounting the gear unit onto the machine shaft
INFORMATION
specifications → see previous page.
Sizes X100 – 160

INFORMATION
• Included in the delivery:
– 2 x retaining rings [8]/[9] and end plate [4]
• Not included in the delivery:
– Threaded rod [2], nut [5], retaining screw [6], ejector screw [8]
1. Apply NOCO® fluid to the hollow shaft [7] and to the shaft end of the machine
shaft [1].
O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F
O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F
[1]
O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F
[7]
18014398819829899
[1] Machine shaft

[7] Hollow shaft
2. Attach the inner retaining ring [8] to the hollow shaft [7]. Secure the end plate [4]
using the outer retaining ring [9]. Thread the threaded rod [2] into the machine
shaft [1]. Observe the tightening torques in chapter ""Thread sizes / tightening
torques" (→ 2 122)".
INFORMATION
The assembly is easier if you first apply lubricant to the threaded rod and nut.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[1]
[8] [2]
[4]
[9]
[7]
2888325003
[1] Machine shaft [7] Hollow shaft

[2] Threaded rod [8] Retaining ring, inside
[4] End plate [9] Retaining ring; outside
3. Tighten the machine shaft [1] with the nut [5] until the shaft end of the machine
shaft [1] and the end plate [4] meet.
[1]
[6]
2879305611
[1] Machine shaft

[4] End plate
[5] Nut
4. Loosen the nut [5]. Screw the threaded rod [2] out.
[5]
[2]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
2887985163
[2] Threaded rod

[5] Nut
5. Secure the machine shaft [1] using the retaining screw [6]. The retaining screw
should also be locked with a suitable threadlocker. Observe the tightening torques
in chapter ""Thread sizes / tightening torques" (→ 2 122)".
[1]
[6]
2879305611
[1] Machine shaft

[2] Retaining screw
NOTICE
Improper assembly of the protection cover may result in risk of injury due to rotating
parts. Dust and dirt may damage the sealing system of the gear unit.
Risk of injury to persons and damage to property.
• Be sure to properly attach the protection cover after completing assembly (dust
proof).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Sizes X170 – 320
INFORMATION
– Retaining screws [3] and end plate [4]
1. Apply NOCO® fluid to the hollow shaft [7] and to the shaft end of the machine
shaft [1].
O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F
O
C
®
O D
N UI
[1] F
L
[7]
9007202133994251
[1] Machine shaft

[7] Hollow shaft
2. Use the retaining screws [3] to attach the end plate [4] centrically to the hollow
shaft [7] and screw the threaded rod [2] onto the machine shaft [1]. Observe the
tightening torques in chapter ""Thread sizes / tightening torques" (→ 2 122)".
INFORMATION
[7]
[1]
[2]
[4]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[3]
310352011
[1] Machine shaft [4] End plate

[2] Threaded rod [7] Hollow shaft
[3] Retaining screw
0m
m
[1]
[4] [5]
310407307
[1] Machine shaft

[4] End plate
[5] Nut
[5]
[2]
2887985163
[2] Threaded rod

[5] Nut
[1]
[6]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
310415883
[1] Machine shaft

[6] Retaining screw
NOTICE
proof).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5.11.5 Removing the gear unit from the machine shaft
NOTICE
Improper disassembly may damage bearings and other components.
• You may only use the hollow shaft as a support for disassembly. Note that sup-
porting on any other parts of the gear unit may damage the material.
Sizes X100 – 160

1. Loosen the retaining screw [6]. Remove the outer retaining ring [8] and the end
plate [4].
[4]
[8]
[6]
9007202105918859
[4] End plate

[6] Retaining screw
[8] Retaining ring
2. To protect the centering bore, screw the retaining screw [6] into the machine
shaft [1].
[1]
[6]
9007202105921291
[1] Machine shaft

22299017/EN – 10/2015
[6] Retaining screw
3. Turn the end plate [4] and remount it with the outer retaining ring [8].
[4]
[8]
9007202105924619
[4] End plate

[8] Retaining ring
4. Thread the ejector screw [8] into the end plate [4] to remove the gear unit from the
machine shaft [1].
INFORMATION
Disassembly is easier if you first apply lubricant to the ejector screw [8] and the
thread in the end plate [4].
[8]
[1] [4]
9007202105928587
[1] Machine shaft

[4] End plate
[8] Ejector screw
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Sizes X170 – 320

1. Loosen the retaining screw [6].
[6]
310460043
[6] Retaining screw
2. Remove the retaining screws [3] and the end plate [4].
[4]
[3]
310464523
[3] Retaining screw

[4] End plate
3. To protect the centering bore, screw the retaining screw [6] into the machine
shaft [1].
[1]
[6]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
310470027
[1] Machine shaft

[6] Retaining screw
4. To disassemble the gear unit, flip the end plate [4] over and use the retaining
screws [3] to reattach it centrically to the hollow shaft [7]. The retaining screws [3]
should be tightened hand-tight.
[3]
[4]
[7]
310474123
[3] Retaining screw

[4] End plate
[7] Hollow shaft
5. Thread the ejector screw [8] into the end plate [4] to remove the gear unit from the
machine shaft [1].
INFORMATION
Disassembly is easier if you first apply lubricant to the ejector screw [8] and the
thread in the end plate [4].
[1]
[4]
[8]
310478219
[1] Machine shaft

[4] End plate
[8] Ejector screw
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Output shaft as a hollow shaft with shrink disk /..H
5.12 Output shaft as a hollow shaft with shrink disk /..H

The material of the machine shaft should be dimensioned by the customer according
to the loads that will occur. The shaft material should have a yield point of at least 320
N/mm².

X..H100 – 150 M30 M24 798
X..H160 – 230 M36 M30 1597
X..H240 – 300 M42 M36 2778
X..H310 – 320 M48 M42 3995

ing state [Nm]
X..H100 - - - 80x2.5
X..H110 - - - 90x2.5
X..H120 - - - 100x3
X..H130 - - - 110x4
X..H140 - - - 120x4
X..H150 - - - 130x4
X..H160 - - - 140x4
X..H170 – 190 M10x30 48 Apply hand pressure -
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Output shaft as a hollow shaft with shrink disk /..H 5
9007199906389771
X.F.. C1 C2 ø D5 ø D6 ø D17 ø D18 ø D19 ø D20 FA K4 K5 K6 MD OH R S6 DIN 33
X.K.. 2 D.M..
X.T..
X..H100 30 14 80H7 81H9 80h6 80h11 81m6 95 2 394.5 -1 46 42 -1 261 173 3 M30 M24
X..H110 30 14 90H7 91H9 90h6 90h11 91m6 105 2 400.5 -1 46 42 -1 265 176 3 M30 M24
X..H120 30 14 100H7 101H9 100h6 100h11 101m6 115 2 437 -1 51 52 -1 286.5 190.5 3 M30 M24
X..H130 30 14 110H7 111H9 110h6 110h11 111m6 125 2 449 -1 55 52 -1 297 194 3 M30 M24
X..H140 30 14 120H7 121H9 120h6 120h11 121m6 135 2 509 -1 59 62 -1 329 222 3 M30 M24
X..H150 30 14 130H7 131H9 130h6 130h11 131m6 145 3 520 -1 66 62 -1 337.5 224.5 3 M30 M24
X..H160 36 16 140H7 141H9 140h6 140h11 141m6 155 3 583 -1 66 73 -1 375 256 4 M36 M30
X..H170 36 17 150H7 151H9 150h6 150h11 151m6 165 3 600 -1 83 73 -1 364 256 4 M36 M30
X..H180 36 17 165H7 166H9 165g6 165h11 166m6 180 3 672 -1 83 83 -1 400 292 4 M36 M30
X..H190 36 17 165H7 166H9 165g6 165h11 166m6 180 3 672 -1 83 83 -1 400 292 4 M36 M30
X..H200 36 17 180H7 181H9 180g6 180h11 181m6 195 3 750 -1 101 83 -1 450.5 319.5 4 M36 M30
X..H210 36 17 190H7 191H9 190g6 190h11 191m6 205 3 753 -1 106 83 -1 453.5 319.5 4 M36 M30
X..H220 36 17 210H7 211H9 210g6 210h11 211m6 230 3 830 -1 118 108 -1 497.5 352.5 5 M36 M30
X2KH220 36 17 210H7 211H9 210g6 210h11 211m6 230 3 900 -1 118 108 -1 532.5 387.5 5 M36 M30
X..H230 36 17 210H7 211H9 210g6 210h11 211m6 230 3 830 -1 118 108 -1 497.5 352.5 5 M36 M30
X2KH230 36 17 210H7 211H9 210g6 210h11 211m6 230 3 900 -1 118 108 -1 532.5 387.5 5 M36 M30
X..H240 45 22 230H7 231H9 230g6 230h11 231m6 250 3 948 -1 140 108 -1 571.5 400.5 5 M42 M36
X2KH240 45 22 230H7 231H9 230g6 230h11 231m6 250 3 1023 -1 140 108 -1 609 438 5 M42 M36
X..H250 45 22 240H7 241H9 240g6 240h11 241m6 260 3 948 -1 140 108 -1 571.5 400.5 5 M42 M36
X2KH250 45 22 240H7 241H9 240g6 240h11 241m6 260 3 1023 -1 140 108 -1 609 438 5 M42 M36
X..H260 45 22 250H7 255H9 250g6 250h11 255m6 280 4 1021 -1 140 108 -1 608 437 5 M42 M36
X..H270 45 22 280H7 285H9 280g6 280h11 285m6 310 4 1056 -1 146 143 -1 630 450 5 M42 M36
X..H280 45 22 280H7 285H9 280g6 280h11 285m6 310 4 1056 -1 146 143 -1 630 450 5 M42 M36
X..H290 45 22 300H7 305H9 300g6 300h11 305m6 330 4 1147 -1 152 143 -1 679 492 5 M42 M36
X..H300 45 22 300H7 305H9 300g6 300h11 305m6 330 4 1147 -1 152 143 -1 679 492 5 M42 M36
X..H310 55 28 320H7 325H9 320g6 320h11 325m6 350 4 1241 -1 165 143 -1 740.5 528.5 5 M42 M36
X..H320 55 28 320H7 325H9 320g6 320h11 325m6 350 4 1241 -1 165 143 -1 740.5 528.5 5 M42 M36
22299017/EN – 10/2015
INFORMATION
• Make sure the dimensions of the machine shaft correspond to SEW‑EURODRIVE
• Observe the manufacturer's shrink disk documentation.
Sizes X100 – 160

INFORMATION
– 2 x retaining rings [8]/[9] and end plate [4].
– Threaded rod [2], nut [5], retaining screw [6], ejector screw [8].
1. Before mounting the gear unit, degrease the hollow shaft [7] and the machine shaft
[1].
NOTICE
Never apply NOCO® fluid directly to the bushing [11] since the compound may get
into the clamping area of the shrink disk when the input shaft is connected.
• The clamping area of the shrink disk between the machine shaft [1] and the hol-
low shaft [7] must remain absolutely free of any grease.
2. Apply some NOCO® fluid on the machine shaft [1] around the bushing [11].
[1]
O
C
®
[11]
O ID
N U
L
F
[7]
[1]
[7]
27021598074707339
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[1] Machine shaft [11] Bushing

[7] Hollow shaft
3. Attach the inner retaining ring [8] to the hollow shaft [7]. Secure the end plate [4]
using the outer retaining ring [9]. Thread the threaded rod [2] into the machine
shaft [1]. Observe the tightening torques in chapter ""Thread sizes / tightening
torques" (→ 2 134)".
INFORMATION
[1]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[9]
9007202134039819

[2] Threaded rod [8] Retaining ring, inside
[4] End plate [9] Retaining ring; outside
0m
m
[1]
[4] [5]
9007202143168139
[1] Machine shaft

[4] End plate
[5] Nut
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[5]
[2]
9007202134044427
[2] Threaded rod

[5] Nut
[6]
9007202143072139
[1] Machine shaft

[6] Retaining screw
7. Slide the shrink disk [9] with untightened screws onto the hollow shaft [7] and posi-
tion the inner ring of the shrink disk [9b] with dimension A.
CAUTION
The loose shrink disk could slip.
• Secure the shrink disk against slipping.
NOTICE
Tightening the clamping screws without first installing a shaft may result in the hol-
low shaft being deformed.
22299017/EN – 10/2015

• Never tighten the screws without the shaft installed.
A
[9]
[7]
[9a]
[9b]
9007202141006091
[7] Hollow shaft [9a] Taper (outer ring)

[9] Shrink disk [9b] Taper bushing (inner ring)
Size A [mm]
XH100 37.5
XH110 38
XH120 39
XH130-140 41
XH150 42
XH160 48
8. Tighten the locking screws [10] hand-tight. In doing so align the bevel (outer ring)
[9a] parallel to the taper bushing (inner ring) [9b] of the shrink disk. Successively
tighten the locking screws [10] in a clockwise direction (not in a diametrically op-
posite sequence), each with a quarter turn. Do not tighten the locking screws [10]
in a diametrically opposite sequence.
INFORMATION
For shrink disks with a slotted taper bushing (inner ring) [9b], tighten the locking
screws [10] to the left and right of the slot one after another, and then, in several
stages, tighten the remaining screws at evenly spaced intervals.
6 1
5 2
22299017/EN – 10/2015
4 3
[9a] [9b] [10]
9007202141008267
[9a] Taper (outer ring)

[9b] Taper bushing (inner ring)
[10] Clamping screws
9. Work around the ring in several stages, evenly tighten the locking screws [10] by
¼ turns until the bevel (outer ring) [9a] and the taper bushing (inner ring) [9b] align
on the face that holds the screws as is shown in the illustration below.
[L1] [L2]
S>0 S=0
[9a]
90° [9b]
[10]
6 1
5 2 [10]
4 3
9007202141010443
[9a] Taper (outer ring) [L1] Condition at the time of shipment (pre-as-
sembled)
[9b] Taper bushing (inner ring) [L2] Completely assembled (ready for opera-
tion)
INFORMATION
If the taper (outer ring) and the taper bushing (inner ring) cannot be aligned on the
face that holds the screws, disassemble the shrink disk again and carefully clean/lub-
ricate it as shown in the next chapter.
NOTICE
• Make sure to attach the protection cover correctly and dust-proof after complet-
ing assembly.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Sizes X170 – 320
INFORMATION
– Retaining screws [3] and end plate [4].
1. Before assembling the gear unit, degrease the hollow shaft [7] and the machine
shaft [1] and apply some NOCO® fluid to the machine shaft [1] in the bushing area
[11].
NOTICE
Never apply NOCO® fluid directly to the bushing [11] since the compound may get
into the clamping area of the shrink disk when the input shaft is connected.
• The clamping area of the shrink disk between the machine shaft [1] and the hol-
low shaft [7] must remain absolutely free of any grease.
[1]
O
C
®
[11]
O D
N UI
L
F
[7]
[1]
[7]
27021598074707339
[1] Machine shaft

[7] Hollow shaft
[11] Bushing
22299017/EN – 10/2015
2. Use the retaining screws [3] to attach the end plate [4] centrically on the hollow
shaft [7]. Thread the threaded rod [2] into the machine shaft [1]. Observe the tight-
ening torques in chapter ""Thread sizes / tightening torques" (→ 2 134)".
[1]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[2]
310497035

[3] Retaining screws
3. Tighten the machine shaft [1] with the nut [5] until the shoulders of the machine
shaft and the hollow shaft [7] meet.
0m
m
[1]
[5]
[7]
310501387

[5] Nut
4. Loosen the nut [5]. Screw the threaded rod [2] out. 22299017/EN – 10/2015
[5]
[2]
310506251
[2] Threaded rod [5] Nut
[1]
[6]
310510731
[1] Machine shaft [6] Retaining screw
6. Slide the shrink disk [9] with untightened screws onto the hollow shaft [7] and posi-
tion the inner ring of the shrink disk [9b] with dimension A.
CAUTION
The loose shrink disk could slip.
• Secure the shrink disk against slipping.
NOTICE
Tightening the clamping screws without first installing a shaft may result in the hol-
low shaft being deformed.
Possible damage to property
• Never tighten the screws without the shaft installed.
[9]
[7] [9a]
[9b]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
9007199565261323
[7] Hollow shaft [9a] Taper (outer ring)

[9] Shrink disk [9b] Taper bushing (inner ring)
Size A [mm]
XH170 – 190 37
XH200 – 210 38
Size A [mm]
XH220 – 230 39
XH240 – 260 48
XH270 – 300 49
XH310 – 320 60
7. Tighten the locking screws [10] hand-tight. In doing so align the bevel (outer ring)
[9a] parallel to the taper bushing (inner ring) [9b] of the shrink disk. Successively
tighten the locking screws [10] in a clockwise direction (not in a diametrically op-
posite sequence), each with a quarter turn. Do not tighten the locking screws [10]
in a diametrically opposite sequence.
INFORMATION
For shrink disks with a slotted taper bushing (inner ring) [9b], tighten the locking
screws [10] to the left and right of the slot one after another, and then, in several
stages, tighten the remaining screws at evenly spaced intervals.
6 1
5 2
[10] 4 3
[9a] [9b]
310537227
[9a] Taper (outer ring) [10] Clamping screws

8. Work around the ring in several stages, evenly tighten the locking screws [10] by
¼ turns until the bevel (outer ring) [9a] and the taper bushing (inner ring) [9b] align
on the face that holds the screws as is shown in the illustration below.
[L1] [L2]
S>0 S=0
[9a]
90° [9b]
[10]
6 1
5 2 [10]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
4 3
9007199565282315
[9a] Taper (outer ring) [L1] Condition at the time of shipment (pre-as-
sembled)
[9b] Taper bushing (inner ring) [L2] Completely assembled (ready for operation)
INFORMATION
If the taper (outer ring) and the taper bushing (inner ring) cannot be aligned on the
face that holds the screws, disassemble the shrink disk again and carefully clean/lub-
ricate it as shown in the next chapter.
NOTICE
proof).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5.12.5 Disassembling the gear unit from the machine shaft
Sizes X100 – 160

NOTICE
• Remove the shrink disk properly. Never completely unscrew the retaining screws
because the shrink disk might jump off and cause an injury.
• Shrink disks and corresponding parts of different gear units must not be
swapped.
1. Loosen the locking screws [10] by a quarter turn one after the other to avoid strain-
ing the connecting surface.
INFORMATION
If the taper (outer ring) [9a] and the taper bushing (inner ring) [9b] do not separate by
themselves: Take the necessary number of retaining screws and screw them into the
removal bores evenly. Tighten the locking screws in several steps until the tapered
bushing separates from the bevel ring.
[9a]
[10] [9b]
[10]
9007202141012619

2. Remove the shrink disk from the hollow shaft. Disassemble the gear unit from the
machine shaft as described in chapter "Disassembling the gear unit from the ma-
chine shaft".
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Sizes X170 – 320
NOTICE
• Remove the shrink disk properly. Never completely unscrew the retaining screws
because the shrink disk might jump off and cause an injury.
• Shrink disks and corresponding parts of different gear units must not be
swapped.
1. Loosen the locking screws [10] by a quarter turn one after the other to avoid strain-
ing the connecting surface.
INFORMATION
If the taper (outer ring) [9a] and the taper bushing (inner ring) [9b] do not separate by
themselves: Take the necessary number of retaining screws and screw them into the
removal bores evenly. Tighten the locking screws in several steps until the tapered
bushing separates from the bevel ring.
[9a]
[10]
[9b]
[10]
9007199673761547

2. Remove the shrink disk from the hollow shaft. Disassemble the gear unit from the
machine shaft as described in chapter "Disassembling the gear unit from the ma-
chine shaft".
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Cleaning and lubricating the shrink disk

Clean and lubricate the shrink disk before installing it again.
INFORMATION
• You must perform the following steps carefully to ensure proper functioning of the
shrink disk. Use only products that are comparable to the specified lubricant.
• If the tapered surfaces of the shrink disk are damaged, the shrink disk can no
longer be used and must be replaced.
[9a]
[10]
1526385163

1. Thoroughly clean the shrink disk from dirt and any remaining lubricants after disas-
sembly.
2. Lubricate the retaining screws [10] on the threads and under the head with an
MoS2 compound, e.g. "gleitmo 100" from FUCHS LUBRITECH (www.fuchs-lub-
ritech.com).
3. Also evenly lubricate the tapered surface of the taper (outer ring) [9a] with a thin
layer of an MoS2 compound, for example "gleitmo 100" from FUCHS LUBRITECH
(www.fuchs-lubritech.com).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Output shaft as a splined hollow shaft /..V 5
5.13 Output shaft as a splined hollow shaft /..V
The material of the machine shaft should be dimensioned by the customer according
to the loads that will occur. The shaft material should have a yield point of at least
320 N/mm².

X..V100 – 150 M30 M24 798
X..V160 – 230 M36 M30 1597
X..V240 – 300 M42 M36 2778
X..V310 – 320 M48 M42 3995

ing state [Nm]
X..V100 - - - 80x2.5
X..V110 - - - 90x2.5
X..V120 - - - 100x3
X..V130 - - - 110x4
X..V140 - - - 125x4
X..V150 - - - 130x4
X..V160 - - - 140x4
X..V170 – 190 M10x30 48 Apply hand pressure -
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Output shaft as a splined hollow shaft /..V
18014399272577419
X.F.. C1 C2 ø D25 ø D26 ø D27 ø D28 ø D29 Dm FA K7 K8 K9 Me OV R S6 DIN 332 DIN 5480
X.K.. D.M..
X.T..
X..100 30 14 81H9 74.4h10 73 81m6 95 6 3 306 -1 81 42 -1 -0.069
81.326 -0.125 173 3 M24 M20 W 75x3x30x24x8f
N 75x3x30x24x9H
X..110 30 14 91H9 84.4h10 83 91m6 105 6 3 311.5 -1 81 42 -1 -0.068
91.092 -0.123 176 3 M24 M20 W 85x3x30x27x8f
N 85x3x30x27x9H
H9
X..120 30 14 101 94.4h10 93 101m6 115 6 3 341 -1 91 52 -1 101.141 -0.068 190.5 3 M30 M24 W 95x3x30x30x8f
-0.122 N 95x3x30x30x9H
H9 -0.078
X..130 30 14 111 109.4h10 108 111m6 125 6 3 346 -1 86 52 -1 116.076 -0.139 194 3 M30 M24 W 110x3x30x35x8f
N 110x3x30x35x9H
X..V140 30 14 121H9 119.4h10 118 121m6 135 6 3 402 -1 101 62 -1 126.095 -0.078 222 3 M30 M24 W 120x3x30x38x8f
-0.138
N 120x3x30x38x9H
X..150 30 14 131H9 129.4h10 128 131m6 145 6 3 407 -1 101 62 -1 136.329 -0.081 224.5 3 M30 M24 W 130x3x30x42x8f
-0.144
N 130x3x30x42x9H
H9
X..160 36 16 141 139.4h10 138 141m6 155 6 3 464 -1 111 73 -1 146.167 -0.080 256 4 M36 M30 W 140x3x30x45x8f
-0.143
N 140x3x30x45x9H
X..170 36 17 151H9 149.4h10 148 151m6 165 6 3 492 -1 121 73 -1 156.172 -0.079 256 4 M36 M30 W 150x3x30x48x8f
-0.141
N 150x3x30x48x9H
X..180 36 17 166H9 159h10 158 166m6 180 10 5 564 -1 166 83 -1 170.009 -0.086 292 4 M36 M30 W 160x5x30x30x8f
-0.152
N 160x5x30x30x9H
H9
X..190 36 17 166 159h10 158 166m6 180 10 5 564 -1 166 83 -1 170.009 -0.086 292 4 M36 M30 W 160x5x30x30x8f
-0.152
N 160x5x30x30x9H
X..200 36 17 191H9 179h10 178 191m6 205 10 5 619 -1 176 83 -1 190.090 -0.087 319.5 4 M36 M30 W 180x5x30x34x8f
-0.155
N 180x5x30x34x9H
X..210 36 17 191H9 179h10 178 191m6 205 10 5 619 -1 176 83 -1 190.090 -0.087 319.5 4 M36 M30 W 180x5x30x34x8f
-0.155
N 180x5x30x34x9H
H9
X..220 36 17 211 199h10 198 211m6 230 10 5 685 -1 201 108 -1 210.158-0.088 352.5 5 M36 M30 W 200x5x30x38x8f
-0.157 N 200x5x30x38x9H
H9
X2K220 36 17 211 199h10 198 211m6 230 10 5 755 -1 201 108 -1 210.158-0.088 387.5 5 M36 M30 W 200x5x30x38x8f
-0.157 N 200x5x30x38x9H
X..230 36 17 211H9 199h10 198 211m6 230 10 5 685 -1 201 108 -1 210.158-0.088 352.5 5 M36 M30 W 200x5x30x38x8f
-0.157 N 200x5x30x38x9H
X2K230 36 17 211H9 199h10 198 211m6 230 10 5 755 -1 201 108 -1 210.158-0.088 387.5 5 M36 M30 W 200x5x30x38x8f
-0.157 N 200x5x30x38x9H
22299017/EN – 10/2015
H9 -0.102 400.5 5 M36

X..240 45 22 231 219h10 218 231m6 250 10 5 777 -1 216 108 -1 M30 W 220x5x30x42x8f
230.215 -0.179
N 220x5x30x42x9H
X2K240 45 22 231H9 219h10 218 231m6 250 10 5 852 -1 216 108 -1 -0.102 438 5 M36 M30 W 220x5x30x42x8f
230.215 -0.179
N 220x5x30x42x9H
X..250 45 22 241H9 219h10 218 241m6 260 10 5 777 -1 216 108 -1 -0.102 400.5 5 M36 M30 W 220x5x30x42x8f
230.215 -0.179
N 220x5x30x42x9H
H9 -0.102 438
X2K250 45 22 241 219h10 218 241m6 260 10 5 852 -1 216 108 -1 5 M36 M30 W 220x5x30x42x8f
230.215 -0.179
N 220x5x30x42x9H
X..260 45 22 255H9 239h10 238 255m6 275 10 5 850 -1 216 108 -1 250.264 -0.102 437 5 M42 M36 W 240x5x30x46x8f
-0.180
N 240x5x30x46x9H
X..270 45 22 285H9 258.4h10 258 285m6 305 16 8 876 -1 248 143 -1 276.230 -0.101 450 5 M42 M36 W 260x8x30x31x8f
-0.177 N 260x8x30x31x9H
X.F.. C1 C2 ø D25 ø D26 ø D27 ø D28 ø D29 Dm FA K7 K8 K9 Me OV R S6 DIN 332 DIN 5480
X.K.. D.M..
X.T..
X..280 45 22 285H9 258.4h10 258 285m6 305 16 8 876 -1 248 143 -1 276.230 -0.101 450 5 M42 M36 W 260x8x30x31x8f
-0.177 N 260x8x30x31x9H
H9
X..290 45 22 305 278.4h10 278 305m6 325 16 8 960 -1 268 143 -1 297.014 -0.105 492 5 M42 M36 W 280x8x30x34x8f
-0.184
N 280x8x30x34x9H
X..300 45 22 305H9 278.4h10 278 305m6 325 16 8 960 -1 268 143 -1 297.014 -0.105 492 5 M42 M36 W 280x8x30x34x8f
-0.184
N 280x8x30x34x9H
X..310 55 28 325H9 298.4h10 298 325m6 345 16 8 1029 -1 318 143 -1 316.655 -0.102 528.5 5 M42 M36 W 300x8x30x36x8f
-0.180
N 300x8x30x36x9H
H9
X..320 55 28 325 298.4h10 298 325m6 345 16 8 1029 -1 318 143 -1 316.655 -0.102 528.5 5 M42 M36 W 300x8x30x36x8f
-0.180
N 300x8x30x36x9H
INFORMATION
Sizes X100 – 160

INFORMATION
– 2 x retaining rings [8][9] and end plate [4]
Apply some NOCO® fluid on the machine shaft around the bushing and the splining.
Mount the gear unit to the machine shaft as described in chapter Mounting the gear
unit to the machine shaft.
Sizes X170 – 320

INFORMATION
– Retaining screws [3] and end plate [4].
22299017/EN – 10/2015
1. Apply some NOCO® fluid on the machine shaft [1] around the bushing [11] and the
splining.
[11]
O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F
O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F
[1]
9007200026427915
[1] Machine shaft

[11] Bushing
2. Push the gear unit onto the machine shaft. The splining of the hollow shaft must
mesh with the splining of the machine shaft.
3. Tighten the retaining screws [3] and screw the threaded rod [2] onto the machine
shaft [1]. Observe the tightening torques in chapter "Thread sizes / tightening
torques" (→ 2 149).
[1] [7] [1]
[4]
[3] [2]
9007200026433547

[3] Retaining screws
22299017/EN – 10/2015
4. Tighten the machine shaft [1] with the nut [5] until the shoulders of the machine
shaft and the hollow shaft [7] meet.
0m
m
[1]
[7]
[5]
771696651
[1] Machine shaft

[5] Nut
[7] Hollow shaft
[5]
[2]
771752587
[2] Threaded rod

[5] Nut
[1]
[6]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
771756683
[1] Machine shaft

[6] Retaining screw
NOTICE
proof).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Torque arm /T 5
5.13.5 Disassembling the gear unit from the machine shaft
NOTICE
Sizes X100 – 160

Disassemble the gear unit from the machine shaft as described in chapter "Disas-
sembling the gear unit from the machine shaft" (→ 2 130).
Sizes X170 – 320

Disassemble the gear unit from the machine shaft as described in chapter "Disas-
sembling the gear unit from the machine shaft" (→ 2 132).
5.14 Torque arm /T

WARNING
Insufficiently secured gear units can fall down during disassembly and assembly.
• Secure the gear unit during assembly and disassembly. Support the gear unit us-
ing appropriate tools.
NOTICE
Deforming the torque arm leads to constraining forces on the output shaft, which
may negatively influence the service life of the output shaft bearings.
• Do not deform the torque arm.
NOTICE
Strain on the torque arm might break the housing.
• Adhere to the specified screw size, tightening torques and required screw
strength.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Torque arm /T
1. To keep the flexural torque on the machine shaft as low as possible, the torque
arm [1] must always be mounted on the same side as the machine that is driven.
The torque arm [1] can be mounted on the top or bottom of the gear unit.
[1] [1]
9007199613871883
2. Align the gear unit horizontally over the threaded bolts and the nuts of the torque
arm.
0° ±1°
1°
[1]
[2]
-5 °
+5
°
°
90
[3]
[4]
9007199613867787
[1] Yoke with bolt

[2] Threaded bolt with nuts
[3] Joint head
[4] Yoke plate with bolt
NOTICE
Make sure that the stud bolt [2] is screwed simultaneously into the yoke [1] and the
joint head [3].
• The stud bolt [2] must be screwed evenly into the yoke [1] and the joint head [3],
covering a length of at least 1 x the bolt's cross section on both sides.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Torque arm /T 5
[1]
Ø
min. = Ø
[2]
[3]
1154061707
[1] Yoke with bolt

[2] Threaded bolt with nuts
[3] Joint head
3. After the alignment process, tighten the nuts with the tightening torques listed in
the following table. Secure it using a suitable threadlocker (e.g. Loctite® 243).
Size Screw/nut Tightening torque
[Nm]
X100 – 110 M20
X120 – 130 M24 140
X140 – 150 M24
X160 – 190 M36 200
X200 – 230 M42 350
X240 – 280 M48 500
X290 – 320 M56 700
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Mounting flange /F
5.15 Mounting flange /F
WARNING
Insufficiently secured gear units can fall down during disassembly and assembly to
the customer machine.
• Secure the gear unit during assembly and disassembly. Support the gear unit us-
ing appropriate tools.
NOTICE
Improper assembly or disassembly of the mounting flange may result in damage to
the gear unit.
• The mounting flange must only be disassembled or assembled under the instruc-
tion of the SEW customer service.
NOTICE
• Gear units with mounting flange cannot be additionally secured on the floor with
a rigid connection. Foot mounting of the gear unit or using a base frame are
therefore not permitted.
Adhere to the following tightening torques when mounting the mounting flange to the
operator's machine:
Screw/nut Tightening torque
Strength class 10.9
[Nm]
M12 137
M16 338
M20 661
M24 1136
INFORMATION
• The screws must not be lubricated during assembly.
• Clean the threads of the screws and apply a thread locking compound (e.g.
Loctite® 243) to the first few threads.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Couplings 5
5.16 Couplings
INFORMATION
Observe the operating instructions of the respective coupling manufacturer.
5.16.1 Mounting tolerances

Adjust the following misalignments according to the coupling manufacturer's specifica-
tions when mounting couplings.
a) Maximum and minimum clearance
b) Radial misalignment
c) Angular misalignment
a) b) c)
211395595
The following table shows various methods for measuring the differing tolerances.
Measuring in- Angular offset Axis offset
struments
Feeler gauge
a1
a
a b
D
a2
f2 f1
This method only achieves an accurate res- The following figure shows the measure-
ult when the deviation of the coupling faces ment of axial offset using a straight-edge.
is eliminated by turning both coupling Permissible values for axial offset are usu-
halves by 180° and then calculating the ally so small that the best measurement
mean value from the difference (a1 – a2). results can be achieved with a micrometer
dial. If you rotate one coupling half together
with the micrometer dial and divide the devi-
ation by two, the deviation displayed on the
dial indicator indicates the offset (dimension
"b") that includes the axial offset of the other
coupling half.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Couplings
Measuring in- Angular offset Axis offset

struments
Micrometer dial
a1
b
a
a
D
f2 f1
f2 f1
a2
899597451
A prerequisite for this measuring method is The following figure shows the how to
that there is no axial play in the shaft bear- measure axial offset using a more accurate
ings when the shafts rotate. If this condition measuring method, as described above.
is not fulfilled, the axial play between the The coupling halves are rotated together
faces of the coupling halves must be elimin- without letting the point of the dial indicator
ated. As an alternative, you can use two mi- slide onto the measuring surface. The axial
crometer dials positioned on the opposite offset is obtained by dividing the deviation
sides of the coupling (to calculate the differ- displayed on the dial indicator (dimension
ence of the two dial indicators when rotating "b").
the coupling).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Motor adapter /MA 5
5.17 Motor adapter /MA
5.17.1 Maximum permitted motor weight
Two criteria must be checked when mounting a motor onto the gear unit.
1. Maximum motor weight depending on gear unit version and type of mounting
2. Maximum motor weight depending on motor adapter size
INFORMATION
The motor weight may not exceed either one of these criteria.
1. Maximum motor weight depends on gear unit design and mounting type
INFORMATION
• The following tables apply only to stationary applications. For mobile applications
(e.g. travel drives), contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE in case of deviating mounting positions/mounting sur-
faces.
The following applies to all tables:

GM = Motor weight
GG = Gear unit weight
Horizontal gear units

Mounting type Mounting position M. / mounting surface F.
M1/F1 and M3/F2
X.F.. X.K.. X.T..
Foot-mounted design X../ B GM ≤ 1.5 GG GM ≤ 1.75 GG GM ≤ 2.0 GG
Shaft-mounted design X../ T GM ≤ 0.5 GG GM ≤ 1.5 GG GM ≤ 1.5 GG
Flange-mounted design X../ F GM ≤ 0.5 GG GM ≤ 0.5 GG GM ≤ 0.5 GG
Vertical gear units
INFORMATION
• When using the shaft-mounted design, please contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Gear unit with mounting position M. / mounting surface F.: For M5/F4 and M6/F3,
please contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.

M5/F3 and M6/F4
X.F.. X.K.. X.T..
22299017/EN – 10/2015

Motor adapter /MA
Upright gear units

M4/F6
X.F.. X.K.. X.T..
Shaft-mounted design X../ T GM ≤ 0.75 GG GM ≤ 1.0 GG GM ≤ 0.75 GG
2. Maximum motor weight depending on motor adapter size

The following maximum loads on the motor adapter must not be exceeded.
X
[1]
[2]
GM
9007199611271819
[1] Center of gravity of the motor X = Distance from the center of gravity
[2] Motor adapter GM = Weight of the mounted motor
INFORMATION
The table only applies to stationary applications. For mobile applications (e.g. travel
drives), consult SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Motor adapter GM X
IEC NEMA [kg] [mm]
100/112 182/184 60 190
132 213/215 110 230
160/180 254/286 220 310
200 324 280 340
225 326 400 420
250 / 280 364 - 405 820 480
315S-L 444 - 449 1450 680
315 2000 740
355 2500 740
The maximum permitted weight GM must be linearly reduced if the centroidal distance
X is increased. GM cannot be increased if the centroidal distance is reduced.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Motor adapter /MA 5
5.17.2 Claw coupling
INFORMATION
Observe the operating instructions of the respective coupling manufacturer.
ROTEX® coupling
[3]
[6] [1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[6]
9007205071635979
Observe the chapter "Preliminary work regarding inspection/maintenance" (→ 2 215).

1. Mount the coupling halves [1][2] onto the input and output shafts [3][4].
NOTICE
Improper assembly can damage the coupling halves [1][2].
• Heat the hub to about 80 °C to facilitate the assembly.
2. Insert the spider [5] and DZ elements in the cam section of the input/output hub [1]
[2].
3. Push the gear unit/motor in axial direction until dimension E is reached. If the gear
unit/motor has already been installed permanently, set dimension E by moving the
hubs [1][2] axially on the input and output shafts [3][4].
NOTICE
22299017/EN – 10/2015

• During assembly, it is essential to observe dimension E so that the girth gear re-
mains axially flexible during operation. The dimension E is listed in the following
table.
Motor adapter /MA
L1
ØdW
ØdH
s s
E
9007205070369419
4. Secure the coupling halves by tightening the set screws [6].

Coupling size Mounting dimensions Set screw
E s dH G Tightening torque
[mm] [mm] [mm] [Nm]
14 13 1.5 10 M4 1.5
19 16 2 18 M5 2
24 18 2 27 M5 2
28 20 2.5 30 M8 10
38 24 3 38 M8 10
42 26 3 46 M8 10
48 28 3.5 51 M8 10
55 30 4 60 M10 17
65 35 4.5 68 M10 17
75 40 5 80 M10 17
90 45 5.5 100 M12 40
100 50 6 113 M12 40
110 55 6.5 127 M16 80
125 60 7 147 M16 80
140 65 7.5 165 M20 140
160 75 9 190 M20 140
180 85 10.5 220 M20 140
Displacement – Aligning the coupling
NOTICE
Improper mounting of the coupling may result in damage.
• The shaft ends must be aligned accurately to ensure a long service life of the
coupling. Strictly adhere to the displacement values specified in the following
chapter. Exceeding these values will damage the coupling. Exact coupling align-
ment increases its service life.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Important:
• The displacement values specified in the table (see next page) are maximum val-
ues that must not occur simultaneously. If radial offset and angular offset occur at
the same time, the permitted displacement values may only be used proportion-
ately.
• Use dial indicator, linear or feeler gauge to check whether the permitted displace-
ment values specified in the table (see next page) are adhered to.
Motor adapter /MA 5
Lmax.
Kr
Kw
E (-) (+) Ka
Lmin. E L
Angular misalignments Radial misalignments Axial misalignments
∆ K w = L 1max. - L 1min. [mm] L max = L + ∆ K a [mm]
5989511307
Example of specified displacement combinations (see diagram):
Example 1: Example 2:
ΔKr = 30% ΔKr = 60%
ΔKw = 70% ΔKw = 40%
∆K total = ∆K r + ∆K w < 100 %

6001385227
100%
90%
80%
70%
Angular offset ∆Kw %
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Radial offset ∆Kr %
5989508747
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Displacement values
The table below shows the displacement values:
ROTEX® size 14 19 24 28 38 42 48 55 65 75 90 100 110 125 140 160 180
Max. axial displacement -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 -0.7 -0.7 -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 -1.5 -1.5 -1.5 -2.0 -2.0 -2.0 -2.5 -2.5
ΔKa [mm] 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.7 6.4
Motor adapter /MA
Max. radial 1500 rpm 0.17 0.20 0.22 0.25 0.28 0.32 0.36 0.38 0.42 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.55 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.68
displacement 1800 rpm 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.19 0.21 0.25 0.26 0.28 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 - - - -
ΔKr [mm]
ΔKw [degree] angular dis- 1.2 1.2 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.2
placement when 0.67 0.82 0.85 1.05 1.35 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.7 3.3 4.3 4.8 5.6 6.5 6.6 7.6 9.0
n = 1500 rpm
ΔKw [mm]
ΔKw [degree] angular dis- 1.1 1.1 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 - - - -
placement when 0.62 0.7 0.75 0.84 1.1 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.3 2.9 3.8 4.2 5.0 - - - -
n = 3000 rpm
ΔKw [mm]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Motor adapter /MA 5
5.17.3 Attaching the motor to the motor adapter
Observe the notes in chapter "Important information" (→ 2 93).
1. Clean the motor shaft and flange surfaces of the motor and the motor adapter.
They must be dry and free of grease.
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to apply NOCO® fluid to
the motor shaft before mounting the coupling half.
2. Push the coupling half onto the motor shaft and position it. When doing this, ob-
serve the information in chapter "Claw coupling" (→ 2 163) and the figure below.
The coupling size and type are indicated on the coupling.
XA
XM
[2]
9007199705735691
[1] Motor adapter XA Distance between the coupling and the motor
adapter flange surface
E Installation dimensions XM Distance between the coupling and the motor
flange surface
→ XM = XA - E
3. Secure the coupling halves using the set screw.

4. Mount the motor onto the motor adapter, making sure that the claws of the coup-
ling engage each other.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Motor adapter /MA
5.17.4 Mounting 2 motors
Motor direction of rotation

For operation of the gear unit with 2 motors [1], make sure that the motors have a
common direction of rotation in regard of the gear unit input shaft.
The following figure illustrates an example of the motor direction of rotation.
[1] [1]
13298345355
Motor weight
When using shaft-mounted X../T and flange-mounted X../F gear units, the total weight
of the 2 motors must not exceed the permitted value of one motor (see the detailed
operating instructions for more information).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5.18 V-belt drives /VBD
5.18.1 Maximum permitted motor weight
When selecting a motor, observe the permitted motor weight, the gear unit version
and the type of gear unit mounting according to the following table.
The table only applies to stationary applications. For mobile applications (e.g. travel
drives), contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Mounting type Gear unit design

X.F.. X.K...
Foot-mounted design X../ B GM ≤ 1.75 GG GM ≤ 1.75 GG
Shaft-mounted design X../ T GM ≤ 1.5 GG GM ≤ 1.5 GG
In this table:
GM = Motor weight
GG = Gear unit weight
5.18.2 Mounting the V-belt drive

1. Mount the motor [1] to the base plate [2] (mounting screws are not included in the
delivery).
2. Clean and degrease the shafts [4], the taper bushings [5] and the belt pulleys [6].
[5]
[4]
[6]
9007200277406091
22299017/EN – 10/2015
V-belt drives /VBD
3. Install the V-belt guard [3] using the provided holding fixtures. Take into account
the room required for applying and tightening the belts, as well as the desired dir-
ection in which the cover will be opened.
[1]
[3]
[2]
9007200277402251
4. Mount the belt pulleys with the taper bushings [6] on the gear unit and motor shaft
[4]. Apply some grease to the screws of the taper bushings and fill the remaining
boreholes with grease. Tighten the locking screws of the taper bushings [5] evenly.
While tightening the screws, apply some light strokes to the hub in order to make
the connection fit properly.
The following table shows the tightening torques for the taper lock bushings [5].
Dimensions Wrench size Number of screws Tightening torque [Nm]
TB 1008, 1108 3 2 5.7
TB 1210, 1215, 1310, 5 2 20
1610, 1615
TB 2012 6 2 31
TB 2517 6 2 49
TB 3020, 3030 8 2 92
TB 3525, 3535 10 3 115
TB 4040 12 3 172
TB 4545 14 3 195
TB 5050 14 3 275
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[4]
[5]
[6]
[6]
[6]
[4]
9007200277411851
5. Position the belt pulleys [7] as close to the shaft shoulder as possible [8]. If the re-
spective rim widths differ, you will have to take this into account accordingly for the
positioning. Check the alignment of the belt pulleys before and after you have
tightened the taper bushings using a straightedge [9] or a suitable alignment tool.
The following table lists the maximum permitted misalignment values.
[8]
[11]
D1
[10]
X1
X2
[8]
D2
[10]
9007200277444747
Pulley diameter D1, D2 [mm] Maximum permitted distance X1, X2
112 0.5
224 1.0
450 2.0
630 3.0
22299017/EN – 10/2015
V-belt drives /VBD
For other diameter values, you have to interpolate the intermediate values for X1, X2.
6. Apply the V-belts [8] to the belt pulleys and tighten them by adjusting the base
plate via the threaded rods [9].
NOTICE
Never apply force to mount the V-belt.
• Mounting using a screwdriver etc. will damage the V-belt externally and intern-
ally.
CAUTION
Never apply force to mount the V-belt.
Possible dangerous situation.
• Be careful not to get your fingers between the disk and the V-belt when adjusting
and turning the V-belt pulleys.
[8]
[9]
18014399532189067
7. Check the tension of the belts using a suitable measuring device. If no special
measuring device is available, you can roughly check the preload using the follow-
ing method.
• Refer to the following table to determine the test force [f] required to deflect the
belt by a specific distance [Ea] in the middle of the free belt length if the belt has
the correct tension.
• Compare the measured values with the values given in the table (on the following
22299017/EN – 10/2015
pages). Adjust the tension of the belt until the measured values correspond to the
values of the table.
β°
L2
L
f
Trum
Ea
Sa
1068875787
8. Tighten all the screws and nuts, then once again check the alignment of the belt
pulleys as well as the tension of the belt.
9. Check the fastening of the V-belt guard. Close and bolt it correctly using the desig-
nated bores.
10. Check the initial belt tension after about 24 hours of operation to compensate the
initial stretching of the V-belts. Also check the taper bushings and the respective
locking screws.
INFORMATION
The data in the following table applies only if the V-belt from SEW‑EURODRIVE is
used. When using V-belts from other manufacturers, the user is responsible for de-
termining the belt tension and for observing the permitted bending moments.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
V-belt drives /VBD
X.F..
Size Gear ratio Motor power Test force Indentation depth Indentation depth Frequency (1/s) Frequency (1/s)
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
Initial assembly Used belts Initial assembly Used belts
XF100 – 1.25 4 25 9.4 10.7 64 56
110 5.5 25 8.2 9.4 67 59
7.5 25 8.1 9.4 70 62
9.2 25 8.2 9.4 68 59
11 25 8.1 9.4 70 61
15 25 7.0 9.5 73 64
1.4 4 25 9.5 10.8 63 55
5.5 25 8.2 9.5 67 59
7.5 25 8.1 9.4 71 62
9.2 25 8.2 9.4 67 59
11 25 8.1 9.4 70 61
15 25 7.0 9.5 73 64
1.6 4 25 9.5 10.7 64 56
5.5 25 8.2 9.4 68 59
7.5 25 8.0 9.3 71 63
9.2 25 8.3 9.5 67 59
11 25 8.0 9.3 71 62
15 50 12.0 13.2 63 55
1.8 4 25 9.5 10.7 64 56
5.5 25 8.2 9.5 67 59
7.5 25 8.1 9.4 71 62
9.2 25 8.1 9.3 69 60
11 25 8.1 9.4 70 61
15 50 11.9 13.0 64 56
XF120-130 1.25 2.2 25 11.0 12.5 52 45
3 25 9.6 11.0 60 53
4 25 12.5 12.5 49 43
5.5 25 9.6 11.0 57 50
7.5 25 9.5 11.0 60 53
9.2 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
11 25 9.5 11.0 60 52
15 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
18.5 50 13.0 15.3 57 50
22 50 12.1 13.9 59 52
30 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
1.4 2.2 25 11.1 12.6 51 45
3 25 9.6 11.1 60 52
4 25 12.6 12.6 49 43
5.5 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
7.5 25 9.6 11.1 60 52
9.2 25 9.6 11.0 58 51
11 25 9.6 11.1 59 52
15 25 8.2 11.1 63 55
18.5 50 13.0 15.4 57 50
22 50 12.0 13.9 59 52
30 25 8.2 11.1 63 55
1.6 2.2 25 11.0 12.5 52 46
3 25 9.5 11.0 60 53
4 25 12.5 12.5 50 44
XF120-130 1.6 5.5 25 9.5 11.0 58 51
7.5 25 9.5 11.0 60 53
9.2 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
11 25 9.5 11.0 59 52
15 50 13.9 15.3 54 48
18.5 50 13.0 15.3 57 50
22 50 11.9 13.8 60 53
30 75 12.7 15.9 56 49
1.8 2.2 25 11.0 12.4 52 46
3 25 9.5 11.0 61 53
22299017/EN – 10/2015
4 25 12.4 12.4 50 44
5.5 25 9.5 11.0 58 51
7.5 25 9.4 10.8 61 54
9.2 25 9.4 10.9 59 51
11 25 9.4 10.8 61 53
15 50 14.0 15.4 54 47
18.5 50 12.9 15.1 58 51
22 50 11.9 13.8 60 53
30 75 13.1 16.3 54 48
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XF140 – 1.25 2.2 25 11.0 12.5 52 45
150 3 25 9.6 11.0 60 53
4 25 12.5 12.5 49 43
5.5 25 9.6 11.0 57 50
7.5 25 9.5 11.0 60 53
9.2 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
11 25 9.5 11.0 60 52
15 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
18.5 50 15.8 18.6 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 17.0 19.7 43 38
45 75 14.7 18.5 45 40
1.4 2.2 25 11.1 12.6 51 45
3 25 9.6 11.1 60 52
4 25 12.6 12.6 49 43
5.5 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
7.5 25 9.6 11.1 60 52
9.2 25 9.6 11.0 58 51
11 25 9.6 11.1 59 52
15 25 8.2 11.1 63 55
18.5 50 15.8 18.7 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 16.7 19.4 44 39
45 75 14.1 19.0 46 40
1.6 2.2 25 11.0 12.5 52 46
3 25 9.5 11.0 60 53
4 25 12.5 12.5 50 44
5.5 25 9.5 11.0 58 51
7.5 25 9.5 11.0 60 53
9.2 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
11 25 9.5 11.0 59 52
15 50 13.9 15.3 54 48
18.5 50 15.7 18.5 47 41
22 50 14.5 16.8 49 43
XF140 – 1.6 30 75 15.9 19.8 45 39
150 37 50 13.8 15.9 52 45
45 75 13.4 18.1 48 42
1.8 2.2 25 11.0 12.4 52 46
3 25 9.5 11.0 61 53
4 25 12.4 12.4 50 44
5.5 25 9.5 11.0 58 51
7.5 25 9.4 10.8 61 54
9.2 25 9.4 10.9 59 51
11 25 9.4 10.8 61 53
15 50 14.0 15.4 54 47
18.5 50 15.7 18.5 47 42
22 50 14.9 17.2 48 42
30 75 16.1 20.1 44 39
37 50 13.7 15.8 52 46
45 75 15.6 19.5 44 39
22299017/EN – 10/2015
V-belt drives /VBD
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XF160 – 1.25 4 25 12.5 12.5 49 43
170 5.5 25 13.5 15.3 45 39
7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 13.5 15.3 45 39
11 25 11.7 13.5 48 43
15 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
18.5 50 15.8 18.6 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 17.0 19.7 43 38
45 75 16.5 20.8 40 35
55 75 15.6 19.5 42 37
75 75 16.9 21.3 40 35
90 75 13.6 18.2 44 38
1.4 4 25 12.6 12.6 49 43
5.5 25 13.4 15.2 45 40
7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 13.5 15.2 45 39
11 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
15 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
18.5 50 15.8 18.7 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 16.7 19.4 44 39
45 75 16.5 20.7 42 37
55 75 16.0 19.9 41 36
75 75 16.1 20.3 42 37
90 75 13.0 17.4 46 40
1.6 4 25 12.5 12.5 50 44
5.5 25 13.4 15.2 45 40
7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 13.5 15.3 45 39
11 25 11.7 13.5 48 42
15 50 17.1 18.7 44 39
18.5 50 15.7 18.5 47 41
22 50 14.5 16.8 49 43
30 75 15.9 19.8 45 39
37 50 13.8 15.9 52 45
45 75 16.0 21.6 40 35
XF160 – 1.6 55 75 16.5 20.9 41 36
170 75 75 16.8 21.2 41 36
90 75 13.5 18.2 44 39
1.8 4 25 12.4 12.4 50 44
5.5 25 13.4 15.2 45 40
7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 13.5 15.3 45 39
11 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
15 50 17.0 18.7 44 39
18.5 50 15.7 18.5 47 42
22 50 14.9 17.2 48 42
30 75 16.1 20.1 44 39
37 50 13.7 15.8 52 46
45 75 19.7 22.8 38 33
55 75 14.4 17.8 44 39
75 75 15.8 19.9 44 38
90 75 12.7 17.0 47 41
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XF180-190 1.25 7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 9.8 13.3 52 46
11 25 11.7 13.5 48 43
15 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
18.5 50 15.8 18.6 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 75 18.3 21.2 42 37
37 75 20.5 23.7 36 31
45 75 17.4 22.0 38 33
55 75 16.7 20.8 39 34
75 75 20.2 25.5 34 30
90 75 18.7 23.3 35 31
110 75 15.5 20.7 39 34
132 75 12.2 16.7 42 37
1.4 7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 9.8 13.2 52 46
11 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
15 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
18.5 50 15.8 18.7 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 50 15.9 18.7 47 41
37 75 20.8 24.0 35 31
45 75 17.8 22.5 39 34
55 75 16.0 19.9 41 36
75 75 19.8 25.0 35 30
90 75 17.2 23.1 36 32
110 75 16.5 22.2 37 32
132 75 13.1 17.9 40 35
1.6 7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 9.8 13.3 52 46
11 25 11.7 13.5 48 42
15 50 17.1 18.7 44 39
18.5 50 15.7 18.5 47 41
22 50 14.5 16.8 49 43
30 75 15.9 19.8 45 39
37 50 16.3 18.7 44 38
45 75 16.0 21.6 40 35
55 75 17.0 21.4 39 35
XF180-190 1.6 75 75 20.3 25.6 34 30
90 75 17.4 23.3 36 32
110 75 15.7 19.6 39 34
132 75 12.4 17.0 42 37
1.8 7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 9.7 13.1 53 47
11 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
15 50 17.0 18.7 44 39
18.5 50 15.7 18.5 47 42
22 50 14.9 17.2 48 42
30 75 16.1 20.1 44 39
37 50 16.1 18.6 44 39
45 75 20.3 23.4 37 32
55 75 17.2 21.7 39 34
75 75 19.8 24.9 35 30
90 75 17.5 23.4 36 31
110 75 15.0 20.0 38 33
132 75 12.7 17.4 41 36
22299017/EN – 10/2015
V-belt drives /VBD
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XF200 – 1.25 7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
210 9.2 25 9.8 13.3 52 46
11 25 11.7 13.5 48 43
15 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
18.5 50 15.8 18.6 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 75 18.3 21.2 42 37
37 75 20.5 23.7 36 31
45 75 17.4 22.0 38 33
55 75 16.7 20.8 39 34
75 75 20.2 25.5 34 30
90 75 18.7 23.3 35 31
110 75 15.5 20.7 39 34
132 75 12.2 16.7 42 37
1.4 7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 9.8 13.2 52 46
11 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
15 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
18.5 50 15.8 18.7 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 50 15.9 18.7 47 41
37 75 20.8 24.0 35 31
45 75 17.8 22.5 39 34
55 75 16.0 19.9 41 36
75 75 19.8 25.0 35 30
90 75 17.2 23.1 36 32
110 75 16.5 22.2 37 32
132 75 13.1 17.9 40 35
1.6 7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 9.8 13.3 52 46
11 25 11.7 13.5 48 42
15 50 17.1 18.7 44 39
18.5 50 15.7 18.5 47 41
22 50 14.5 16.8 49 43
30 75 15.9 19.8 45 39
37 50 16.3 18.7 44 38
45 75 16.0 21.6 40 35
XF200 – 1.6 55 75 17.0 21.4 39 35
210 75 75 20.3 25.6 34 30
90 75 17.4 23.3 36 32
110 75 15.7 19.6 39 34
132 75 12.4 17.0 42 37
1.8 7.5 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
9.2 25 9.7 13.1 53 47
11 25 11.7 13.5 49 43
15 50 17.0 18.7 44 39
18.5 50 15.7 18.5 47 42
22 50 14.9 17.2 48 42
30 75 16.1 20.1 44 39
37 50 16.1 18.6 44 39
45 75 20.3 23.4 37 32
55 75 17.2 21.7 39 34
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XF220 – 1.25 11 50 19.7 21.7 38 33
230 15 50 19.8 21.8 38 33
18.5 50 18.6 21.8 40 35
22 50 17.5 20.3 41 36
30 25 11.9 16.1 43 38
37 75 20.5 23.7 36 31
45 75 17.4 22.0 38 33
55 75 18.3 22.8 36 31
75 75 20.2 25.5 34 30
90 75 18.7 23.3 35 31
110 75 19.8 25.0 34 30
132 75 17.2 23.1 37 32
160 125 19.1 23.2 32 28
200 125 16.6 20.5 35 31
1.4 11 50 20.0 22.0 38 33
15 25 11.9 16.1 43 38
18.5 50 19.0 22.3 39 34
22 50 17.5 20.3 41 36
30 25 11.9 16.1 43 38
37 75 18.9 23.6 37 32
45 75 17.8 22.5 39 34
55 75 17.5 23.4 36 32
75 75 19.8 25.0 35 30
90 75 17.2 23.1 36 32
110 75 19.4 24.5 35 31
132 75 16.9 22.6 37 33
160 125 18.2 22.1 34 30
200 125 15.8 19.6 37 32
1.6 11 50 19.7 21.6 38 34
15 50 20.4 22.4 37 32
18.5 50 18.7 22.1 40 35
22 50 17.4 20.1 41 36
30 75 18.9 23.6 37 33
37 50 16.3 18.7 44 38
45 75 16.0 21.6 40 35
55 75 19.9 25.1 34 30
75 75 20.3 25.6 34 30
90 75 17.4 23.3 36 32
110 75 19.6 24.7 35 30
132 75 17.0 22.8 37 33
XF220 – 1.6 160 125 18.2 22.1 34 30
230 200 125 15.8 19.6 37 33
1.8 11 25 14.0 16.2 40 36
15 50 20.0 22.0 38 33
18.5 50 18.8 22.2 39 35
22 50 17.2 19.9 42 37
30 75 19.4 24.2 36 32
37 50 16.1 18.6 44 39
45 75 20.3 23.4 37 32
55 75 17.4 21.6 36 32
75 75 19.8 24.9 35 30
90 75 17.5 23.4 36 31
110 75 20.0 25.3 34 30
132 75 17.4 21.6 36 32
160 125 18.9 23.0 33 29
200 125 16.4 20.4 36 31
22299017/EN – 10/2015
V-belt drives /VBD
X.K..
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XK100 – 1.25 4 25 9.4 10.7 64 56
110 5.5 25 8.2 9.4 67 59
7.5 25 8.1 9.4 70 62
9.2 25 8.2 9.4 68 59
11 25 8.1 9.4 70 61
15 25 7.0 9.5 73 64
18.5 50 11.0 13.0 64 57
1.4 4 25 9.5 10.8 63 55
5.5 25 8.2 9.5 67 59
7.5 25 8.1 9.4 71 62
9.2 25 8.2 9.4 67 59
11 25 8.1 9.4 70 61
15 25 7.0 9.5 73 64
18.5 50 11.2 13.2 66 58
1.6 4 25 9.5 10.7 64 56
5.5 25 8.2 9.4 68 59
7.5 25 8.0 9.3 71 63
9.2 25 8.3 9.5 67 59
11 25 8.0 9.3 71 62
15 50 12.0 13.2 63 55
18.5 50 11.1 13.1 67 58
1.8 4 25 9.5 10.7 64 56
5.5 25 8.2 9.5 67 59
7.5 25 8.1 9.4 71 62
9.2 25 8.1 9.3 69 60
11 25 8.1 9.4 70 61
15 50 11.9 13.0 64 56
18.5 50 11.0 12.9 68 60
XK120-130 1.25 5.5 25 9.6 11.0 57 50
7.5 25 9.5 11.0 60 53
9.2 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
11 25 9.5 11.0 60 52
15 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
18.5 50 13.0 15.3 57 50
22 50 12.1 13.9 59 52
30 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
37 75 14.0 16.2 52 46
45 75 14.7 18.5 45 40
1.4 5.5 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
7.5 25 9.6 11.1 60 52
9.2 25 9.6 11.0 58 51
11 25 9.6 11.1 59 52
15 25 8.2 11.1 63 55
18.5 50 13.0 15.4 57 50
22 50 12.0 13.9 59 52
30 25 8.2 11.1 63 55
37 75 13.9 16.1 53 46
45 75 14.1 19.0 46 40
1.6 5.5 25 9.5 11.0 58 51
7.5 25 9.5 11.0 60 53
9.2 25 9.6 11.1 57 50
11 25 9.5 11.0 59 52
15 50 13.9 15.3 54 48
XK120-130 1.6 18.5 50 13.0 15.3 57 50
22 50 11.9 13.8 60 53
30 75 12.7 15.9 56 49
37 50 11.1 12.8 64 57
45 75 13.4 18.1 48 42
1.8 5.5 25 9.5 11.0 58 51
22299017/EN – 10/2015
7.5 25 9.4 10.8 61 54

9.2 25 9.4 10.9 59 51
11 25 9.4 10.8 61 53
15 50 14.0 15.4 54 47
18.5 50 12.9 15.1 58 51
22 50 11.9 13.8 60 53
30 75 13.1 16.3 54 48
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XK140 – 1.25 15 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
150 18.5 50 15.8 18.6 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 17.0 19.7 43 38
45 75 14.7 18.5 45 40
55 75 15.5 19.4 42 37
75 75 16.9 21.3 40 35
90 75 13.6 18.2 44 38
1.4 15 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
18.5 50 15.8 18.6 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 17.0 19.7 43 38
45 75 14.7 18.5 45 40
55 75 15.5 19.4 42 37
75 75 16.9 21.3 40 35
90 75 13.6 18.2 44 38
1.6 15 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
18.5 50 15.8 18.6 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 17.0 19.7 43 38
45 75 14.7 18.5 45 40
55 75 15.5 19.4 42 37
75 75 16.9 21.3 40 35
90 75 13.6 18.2 44 38
1.8 15 25 8.2 11.1 62 55
18.5 50 15.8 18.6 47 41
22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 17.0 19.7 43 38
45 75 14.7 18.5 45 40
55 75 15.5 19.4 42 37
75 75 16.9 21.3 40 35
90 75 13.6 18.2 44 38
XK160 – 1.25 22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
170 30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 17.0 19.7 43 38
45 75 16.5 20.8 40 35
55 75 15.5 19.4 42 37
75 75 16.9 21.3 40 35
90 75 13.6 18.2 44 38
110 75 12.4 16.5 46 41
132 75 11.2 12.0 56 49
1.4 22 50 14.6 16.9 49 43
30 25 9.9 13.4 51 45
37 75 16.7 19.4 44 39
45 75 16.5 20.7 42 37
55 75 14.9 18.6 44 39
75 75 16.1 20.3 42 37
90 75 13.0 17.4 46 40
110 75 13.3 17.8 45 40
132 75 10.8 11.1 57 50
1.6 22 50 14.5 16.8 49 43
30 75 15.9 19.8 45 39
37 50 13.8 15.9 52 45
45 75 16.0 21.6 40 35
55 75 16.5 20.9 41 36
75 75 16.8 21.2 41 36
90 75 13.5 18.2 44 39
22299017/EN – 10/2015
110 75 16.1 17.2 47 41

132 75 13.9 14.6 51 45
1.8 22 50 14.9 17.2 48 42
30 75 16.1 20.1 44 39
37 50 13.7 15.8 52 46
45 75 19.7 22.8 38 33
55 75 16.1 20.3 42 37
75 75 15.8 19.9 44 38
90 75 12.7 17.0 47 41
110 75 15.1 15.8 49 43
132 75 12.6 13.7 53 47
V-belt drives /VBD
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XK180-190 1.25 30 75 18.3 21.2 42 37
37 75 20.5 23.7 36 31
45 75 17.4 22.0 38 33
55 75 16.7 20.8 39 34
75 75 20.2 25.5 34 30
90 75 18.7 23.3 35 31
110 75 15.5 20.7 39 34
132 75 12.2 16.7 42 37
1.4 30 50 15.9 18.7 47 41
37 75 20.8 24.0 35 31
45 75 17.8 22.5 39 34
55 75 16.0 19.9 41 36
75 75 19.8 25.0 35 30
90 75 17.2 23.1 36 32
110 75 16.5 22.2 37 32
132 75 13.1 17.9 40 35
1.6 30 75 15.9 19.8 45 39
37 50 16.3 18.7 44 38
45 75 16.0 21.6 40 35
XK180-190 1.6 55 75 17.0 21.4 39 35
75 75 20.3 25.6 34 30
90 75 17.4 23.3 36 32
110 75 15.7 19.6 39 34
132 75 12.4 17.0 42 37
1.8 30 75 16.1 20.1 44 39
37 50 16.1 18.6 44 39
45 75 20.3 23.4 37 32
55 75 17.2 21.7 39 34
75 75 19.8 24.9 35 30
90 75 17.5 23.4 36 31
110 75 15.0 20.0 38 33
132 75 12.7 17.4 41 36
XK200 – 1.25 30 50 20.1 23.8 36 32
210 37 50 18.8 22.1 40 35
45 75 18.7 23.4 38 33
55 75 18.3 22.8 36 31
75 75 20.2 25.5 34 30
90 75 18.7 23.3 35 31
110 75 19.8 25.0 34 30
132 75 17.2 23.1 37 32
160 125 19.1 23.2 32 28
200 125 16.6 20.5 35 31
1.4 30 75 23.4 27.1 33 29
37 75 20.2 25.3 36 31
45 75 17.2 21.7 39 34
55 75 17.5 23.4 36 32
75 75 19.8 25.0 35 30
90 75 17.2 23.1 36 32
110 75 19.4 24.5 35 31
132 75 16.9 22.6 37 33
160 125 18.2 22.1 34 30
200 125 15.8 19.6 37 32
1.6 30 75 22.4 27.8 33 29
37 75 19.1 23.9 36 32
45 75 16.0 21.6 40 35
55 75 19.9 25.1 34 30
75 75 20.3 25.6 34 30
90 75 17.4 23.3 36 32
110 75 19.6 24.7 35 30
132 75 17.0 22.8 37 33
160 125 18.2 22.1 34 30
22299017/EN – 10/2015
200 125 15.8 19.6 37 33

1.8 30 75 21.9 27.2 34 30
37 75 18.8 23.4 37 33
45 75 20.3 23.4 37 32
55 75 17.4 21.6 36 32
75 75 19.8 24.9 35 30
90 75 17.5 23.4 36 31
110 75 20.0 25.3 34 30
132 75 17.4 21.6 36 32
160 125 18.9 23.0 33 29
200 125 16.4 20.4 36 31
Base frame /BF 5
[kW] [N] (mm) (mm)
XK220 – 1.25 37 50 18.8 22.1 40 35
230 45 75 18.7 23.4 38 33
XK220 – 1.25 55 75 18.3 22.8 36 31
230 75 75 20.2 25.5 34 30
90 75 18.7 23.3 35 31
110 75 19.8 25.0 34 30
132 75 17.2 23.1 37 32
160 125 19.1 23.2 32 28
200 125 16.6 20.5 35 31
1.4 30 75 23.4 27.1 33 29
37 75 20.2 25.3 36 31
45 75 17.2 21.7 39 34
55 75 17.5 23.4 36 32
75 75 19.8 25.0 35 30
90 75 17.2 23.1 36 32
110 75 19.4 24.5 35 31
132 75 16.9 22.6 37 33
160 125 18.2 22.1 34 30
200 125 15.8 19.6 37 32
1.6 30 75 22.4 27.8 33 29
37 75 19.1 23.9 36 32
45 75 16.0 21.6 40 35
55 75 19.9 25.1 34 30
75 75 20.3 25.6 34 30
90 75 17.4 23.3 36 32
110 75 19.6 24.7 35 30
132 75 17.0 22.8 37 33
160 125 18.2 22.1 34 30
200 125 15.8 19.6 37 33
1.8 30 75 21.9 27.2 34 30
37 75 18.8 23.4 37 33
45 75 20.3 23.4 37 32
55 75 17.4 21.6 36 32
75 75 19.8 24.9 35 30
90 75 17.5 23.4 36 31
110 75 20.0 25.3 34 30
132 75 17.4 21.6 36 32
160 125 18.9 23.0 33 29
5.19 Base frame /BF

Observe the following information:
• The support structure of the foot mounting must be rigid and adequately dimen-
sioned.
• The base frame must only be bolted onto the gear unit foundation at the mounting
hole positions provided for this purpose. It is important that the base frame is not
deformed (hazard of damage to gear unit and coupling).
• Do not twist the base frame by misaligning the gear unit output shaft to the ma-
chine shaft.
5.20 Swing base /SB

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Observe the following information:

• The system must be adequately dimensioned to be able to absorb the torque of
the torque arm.
• Do not twist the swing base during assembly (hazard of damage to gear unit and
coupling).
Motor pump /ONP
5.21 Motor pump /ONP
INFORMATION
Before installation/assembly, first read the addendum to the operating instructions
"Motor Pump /ONP", which includes the manufacturer's documentation.
5.22 Fan /FAN

Note the following:
• If protective devices for couplings or similar are installed on gear units equipped
with a fan, sufficient clearance must be provided for the intake of cooling air.
For the required clearance, refer to the dimension drawing in the catalog or the or-
der documents.
• Never operate the gear unit if the protective housing is not installed.
• Protect the fan guard from external damage.
• Make sure the air intake vents of the fan are not blocked or covered.
Observe the following tightening torques for installing the fan guard:
Screws/nuts Tightening torques
Strength class 8.8
[Nm]
M8 27

5.23.1 Notes on connection / installation
NOTICE
Improper mounting of the water cooling cover may result in damage to the gear unit.
• Observe the following information:
• Using thread seal tape on the pipe threads increases the resistance between the
connection parts as well as the risk of cracking in the water cooling cover. Do not
tighten the threads excessively.
• The water cooling cover is not equipped with a water drain. In the event of repair
work, you have to install a drain on the cooling water outlet to ensure proper drain-
ing of the cooling water.
• Connect the water cooling cover to the existing cooling circuit. The direction of flow
is user-defined.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• Cooling water temperature and flow rate according to the order documents.
• Make sure the cooling water pressure does not exceed 6 bars.
• In the event of temperature levels below 0 °C and longer downtimes, drain the
cooling water from the circuit. Use compressed air to remove any remaining water.
• Refer to chapter "Cooling media" to determine the permitted cooling media.
The following measures can be taken to ensure proper functioning in different sys-
tems:
• Install a safety valve in the cooling water inlet to prevent fluctuations in pressure
and volume.
• Install filters in the cooling water inlet to protect the heat exchanger from dirt and
mud in particular if the cooling water is obtained from sources other than the muni-
cipal water supply system.
• Install an automatic throttle valve in the respective inlet to compensate pressure.
5.23.2 Removal
Observe the notes in chapter ""Inspection/Maintenance"" (→ 2 244).
5.23.3 Cooling media
INFORMATION
• Note that the service life, the efficiency, and the maintenance intervals of the heat
exchanger depend to a great degree on the quality and ingredients of the cooling
medium.
• Special procedures are required when sea water or brackish water is used. Con-
tact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Permitted cooling media

• The permitted cooling media is pure water. The use of cooling water additives,
such as antifreeze or corrosion inhibitor, might negatively influence the cooling ca-
pacity and compatibility of materials. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Cooling water temperature and flow rate of oil and cooling water according to the
order documents.
Dirt
The quantity of suspended solids (ball-shaped, particle size < 0.25 mm) should be
less than 10 mg/l. Threadlike contaminants increase the risk of pressure loss.
Corrosion
Limit values: free chlorine < 0.5 ppm, chlorine ions < 200 ppm, sulfate < 100 ppm, am-
monia < 10 ppm, free CO < 10 ppm, pH value 7-9.
The following ions do not have a corrosive effect under normal conditions: phosphate,
nitrate, nitrite, iron, manganese, sodium, potassium.
22299017/EN – 10/2015

5.24.1 Notes on connection / installation
NOTICE
Improper installation of the water cooling cartridge can damage the gear unit.
• Observe the following information:
• Using thread seal tape on the pipe threads increases the resistance between the
connection parts as well as the risk of cracking in the cast parts of the water cool-
ing cartridge. Do not tighten the threads excessively.
• The water cooling cartridges are not equipped with a water drain. In the event of
repair work, you have to install a drain on the cooling water outlet to ensure proper
draining of the cooling water.
• For connecting the water cooling cartridge, use only piping and mounting parts of
the same or of compatible material.
• Check the water cooling cartridge to see that it is free from soiling and foreign ob-
jects in the pipe connection to ensure unobstructed flow of the cooling media.
• Avoid tensions on the connection points when connecting the piping. Support the
pipes properly, if required.
• Install the cooling water outlet pipe in such a way that the water cooling cartridge is
permanently flooded by cooling water.
• Refer to chapter ""Cooling media"" (→ 2 185) to determine the permitted cooling
media.
• Cooling water temperature and flow rate according to the order documents.
• Make sure the cooling water pressure does not exceed 10 bars.
• In the event of temperature levels below 0 °C and longer downtimes, drain the
cooling water from the circuit. Use compressed air to remove any remaining water.
• The recommended filtering is 100 μm.
• Connect the water cooling cartridge to the existing cooling circuit. The direction of
flow is user-defined.
• For gear units with 2 water cooling cartridges, connect the cooling circuit in paral-
lel, see following figure.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
370075915
Supply (cold water)
Return (warm water outflow)
The following measures can be taken to ensure proper functioning in different sys-
tems:
• Install a safety valve in the cooling water inlet to prevent fluctuations in pressure
and volume.
• Install filters in the cooling water inlet to protect the heat exchanger from dirt and
mud in particular if the cooling water is obtained from sources other than the muni-
cipal water supply system.
• Install an automatic throttle valve in the respective inlet to compensate pressure.
5.24.2 Removal
Observe the notes in chapter "Inspection/Maintenance" (→ 2 246).
5.24.3 Requirements on the water quality
INFORMATION
Special measures have to be taken when using sea water or brackish water. Contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
The following requirements on the water quality are recommendations. In exceptional

cases, certain concentrations of substances of content might cause unforeseen reac-
tions.
The quality of the water as well as its substances are important factors for assessing
the cooling water available for water cooling cartridges. The water quality is determ-
ined by the water hardness and the pH value of the water.
Water hardness
Water hardness is defined by the amount of hardeners (carbonates and bicarbonates)
in the water. Hardeners accumulate on the surface of the water cooling cartridge in
particular at high temperatures and in this way impair the performance. Take these de-
posits into account when selecting the water cooling cartridge for extremely hard wa-
ter.
The following table shows the classification of German degrees of hardness to water
quality °dH:
Degree of hardness1) Water quality

0 – 5 °dH Very soft water
5 – 10 °dH Soft water
10 – 20 °dH Medium hard water
20 – 30 °dH Hard water
22299017/EN – 10/2015
> 30 °dH Very hard water

1) 10 mg/l of hardener corresponds to 1 °dH
pH value
• The water cooling cartridge partially consists of a copper and nickel alloy, to which
the following applies:
→ Corrosion problems when pH value < 6
• With alkaline water:
→ Corrosion problems when water hardness < 6°dH.
Smaller values can cause corrosion due to free carbonic acid.
The following table describes the classification of the water quality based on the
pH value:
pH Value Water quality

4.5 Very acidic
4.5 – 6.0 Acidic
6.0 – 6.8 Slightly acidic
7.0 Neutral
7.2 – 7.7 Slightly alkaline
7.7 – 8.2 Alkaline
8.2 Very alkaline
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Cooling water assessment based on water substances
The following table provides an overview of the resistance of copper pipes against
substances in non-potable water.
Assessment criterion Approximate concentra- Evaluation

tion [mg/l] CuNi10Fe1Mn
pH Value <6 0
6 to 9 +
>9 0
Chloride up to 1000 +
> 1000 + (< 25000 mg/l)
Sulfate up to 70 +
70 to 300 +
> 300 + (< 25000 mg/l)
Nitrate up to 100 +
> 100 0
Free (aggressive) carbonic up to 20 +
acid
20 to 50 0
> 50 –
Oxygen up to 2 +
>2 +
Ammonium up to 2 +
2 to 20 +
> 20 –
Iron (dissolved) up to 10 0
> 10 –
Manganese (dissolved) up to 1 0
>1 –
Free chlorine up to 5 permanently < 0.5 mg/l
>5 intermittently < 3.0 mg/l
Sulfide 0
Ammonia + (< 15 mg/l)
Key
+ = usually good resistivity
22299017/EN – 10/2015
0 = corrosion problems can occur in particular if several factors are assessed with
0
– = we advise against use
Types of cooling water/characteristics

Note the following conditions:
Industrial water
• Usually untreated water (no drinking water)
• Often very contaminated
• A water analysis is necessary for assessment
• Copper, brass and steel are very resistant against industrial water
Stream water and river water

• We recommend using copper brass pipes
• Cast iron parts must be protected against corrosion by suitable coating
• Usually untreated water (no drinking water)
• Often very contaminated
• A water analysis is necessary for assessment
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication /OWC 5
INFORMATION
"Oil-Water Cooler with Motor Pump for Splash Lubrication /OWC", which includes the
manufacturer's documentation.

INFORMATION
"Oil-Air Cooler for Splash Lubrication /OAC", which includes the manufacturer's docu-
mentation.

INFORMATION
"Oil-Water Cooler for Pressure Lubrication /OWP", which includes the manufacturer's
documentation.

INFORMATION
"Oil-Air Cooler for Splash Lubrication /OAP", which includes the manufacturer's docu-
mentation.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Limit temperature for gear unit start
5.29 Limit temperature for gear unit start

The minimum permitted ambient temperature/oil temperature for gear unit startup de-
pends on the viscosity of the oil used and the lubrication type of the gear unit.
NOTICE
Starting up the gear unit below the permitted minimum oil temperature may damage
the unit.
• Observe the specified start temperatures for gear unit startup.
INFORMATION
The following tables show the limit temperatures (minimum ambient temperatures) for
gear unit startup without oil heater. The gear unit and oil supply systems with heating
elements can be heated to the minimum required start temperature if the ambient
temperature is too low.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Limit temperature for gear unit start 5
5.29.1 Mineral oil
Minimum temperature for gear unit start

Lubricants
Lubrication type Description
ISO VG320 ISO VG220 ISO VG150
Splash lubrication Initial temperature for gear unit start
-12 °C -15 °C -20 °C
bath lubrication (minimum permitted oil bath temperature)
Pressure lubrication with shaft
end pump for the universal, ho- Initial temperature for gear unit start
+5 °C 0 °C -5 °C
rizontal and thermal housing (minimum permitted oil bath temperature)
(HU/HH/HT)
Initial temperature for gear unit start
end pump for the agitator +15 °C +10 °C +5 °C
(minimum permitted oil bath temperature)
housing (HA)
Pressure lubrication with motor Initial temperature for gear unit start
+15 °C +10 °C +5 °C
pump (minimum permitted oil bath temperature)
5.29.2 Synthetic oil
Minimum temperature for gear unit start

Lubricants
Lubrication type Description
ISO VG320 ISO VG220 ISO VG150
Splash lubrication Initial temperature for gear unit start
-25 °C -25 °C -25 °C
bath lubrication (minimum permitted oil bath temperature)
end pump for the universal, ho- Initial temperature for gear unit start
-5 °C -8 °C -15 °C
rizontal and thermal housing (minimum permitted oil bath temperature)
(HU/HH/HT)
Initial temperature for gear unit start
end pump for the agitator +8 °C +3 °C -3 °C
(minimum permitted oil bath temperature)
housing (HA)
Pressure lubrication with motor Initial temperature for gear unit start
+8 °C +3 °C -3 °C
pump (minimum permitted oil bath temperature)
INFORMATION
The specified temperatures refer to the average values of the permitted lubricants
based on the lubricant table. In borderline cases, the permitted temperature of the
lubricant that is actually being used must be verified. When configuring the motor, ob-
serve the increased starting torque at low temperatures. It may be necessary to con-
tact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater
5.30 Oil heater
WARNING
Danger of electric shock.
• De-energize the oil heater before you start working on the unit.
• Secure the oil heater against unintended power-up.
NOTICE
Improper installation of the oil heater may result in damage to the gear unit.
• Make sure the heating elements are fully immersed in the oil bath to avoid any
damage.
NOTICE
Improper change of the mounting position might result in malfunction of the gear unit
heater.
SEW‑EURODRIVE. The warranty will become void without prior consultation.
INFORMATION
The electrical connection of the heating elements and the thermostat may only be es-
tablished by qualified personnel according to the current supply conditions on site.
Observe the connection voltage and the switching capacity of the thermostat. Im-
proper or incorrect cabling can damage the electrical components.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater 5
5.30.1 Information on the function of the oil heater
• The heater is screwed into the gear unit housing ex works and is controlled by a
thermostat. The trip temperature of the thermostat is set at the factory depending
on the lubricant used.
• The trip point of the thermostat of the oil heater, see table ""Thermostat setting on
delivery"" (→ 2 192) is factory-set to a temperature of about 5 K above the re-
spective limit temperature "initial temperature for gear unit startup", see chapter
""Limit temperature for gear unit startup"" (→ 2 192).
At this temperature, see table ""Minimum permitted initial temperature for gear unit
start"" (→ 2 192), the thermostat disables the oil heater. Only then, the gear unit
may be started up. The thermostat activates the oil heater again once the temper-
ature is about 5 K below the trip point.
• In order to prevent the oil from burning, the heating elements of the heater have a
maximum surface load. This is why the heating process for cold gear unit oil can
take between one and several hours. The exact duration of the heating process
before the start varies depending on the gear unit size, type, mounting position, oil
quantity, and ambient temperature.
This is why the thermostat has to be energized permanently even when the drive
is at a brief standstill.
If the drive is at standstill over a longer period, for example during holidays, and
the thermostat is not energized, you have to make sure that the thermostat is ener-
gized in due time before the drive is started up.
• Thermostat and oil heater are installed in the gear unit and ready for operation.
Prior to startup, wire them properly and connect them to the current supply.
• Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if a differing oil viscosity class is used or if ambient
temperatures fall below the specified limit temperature.
• During installation, check the thermostat setting according to chapter ""Thermo-
stat"" (→ 2 196).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater
5.30.2 Thermostat
Electrical connection
1
[1]
ϑ>
[2]
[4]
2 4
9007199705734027
• Connect to terminals (1, 2 and 4) as shown in the wiring diagram

• Connect the protective earth to terminal "PE"
INFORMATION
Observe the manufacturer's safety instructions.
Technical data
• Ambient temperature: -40 ˚C to +80 °C
• Scale range: -50 ˚C to +100 °C
• Maximum switching capacity:
AC 230 V +10%, 10 A
DC 230 V +10%, 0.25 A
• Cable entry: M20x1.5 for a cable diameter of 5 to 10 mm
• IP65 degree of protection according to EN 60529
The following figure shows the possible setting range of the thermostat. In this ex-
ample, the pointer is on 0 °C.
40
60 20
80 0
100 –50
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5948400011
Oil heater 5
5.30.3 Connection power and electrical connection of resistor element
The gear unit heater comes equipped with cable glands and jumpers. They are in-
cluded in the scope of delivery of the screw-in heaters and are already preassembled.
The gear unit heater is connected to the current supply via terminal studs. They do not
depend on the size of the heater and always have an M4 thread. We recommend us-
ing RKS4 ring cable lugs with small grommets.
AC voltage / 1-phase / 230 V / series connection
The following figure shows the wiring ex works (connection space):
[3]
L1 N
[1]
PE
N
L1
[2]
9007202007368715
[1] Thermostat
[2] Heater
[3] Jumper
The table below shows the connected load of the heaters that can be installed.
Pinst Pinst
Gear unit 1 heating element 2 heating elements
Size Design [K/h] [K/h]
X100 X2K / X2F / X3K 1 x 0.4 6 2 x 0.4 11
X3T / X3F 1 x 0.3 3 2 x 0.3 7
X110 X3T / X3F 1 x 0.3 4 - -
X120 X4F / X3T / X4T 1 x 0.3 3 2 x 0.3 5
X130 X4F / X3T / X4T 1 x 0.4 3 - -
X140 X4F / X3T / X4T 1 x 0.4 3 2 x 0.4 5
K/h = Heating capacity [Kelvin/hour]

Pinst = Power of the installed heater
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater
AC voltage / 1-phase / 230 V / parallel connection

Cable entry: 1xPg11
[3]
L1 N
N
[1]
PE
L1
[2]
9007202007371531
Observe the electrical characteristics of the control range

[1] Thermostat
[2] Heater
[3] Jumper
Pinst Pinst
X110 X2F / X2K / X3K 1 x 0.6 6 - -
X120 X2K 1 x 0.6 6 2 x 0.6 11
X2F / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 0.7 6 2 x 0.7 11
X130 X2F / X2K / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 0.7 5 - -
X140 X2K 1 x 0.7 4 2 x 0.7 9
X2F / X3F / X3K / X4K 1 x 0.8 5 2 x 0.8 10
X150 X2K 1 x 0.8 5 - -
X2F / X3F / X3K / X4K 1 x 0.9 5 - -
X4F / X3T / X4T 1 x 0.6 3 - -
X160 X2K 1 x 0.9 4 2 x 0.9 8
X2F / X3F / X3K / X4K 1 x 1.1 4 2 x 1.1 8
X4F / X3T / X4T 1 x 0.7 3 2 x 0.7 5
X170 X2K 1 x 0.9 4 - -
X2F / X3F / X3K / X4K 1 x 1.1 4 - -
X4F / X3T / X4T 1 x 0.7 3 - -

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater 5
AC voltage / 1-phase / 230 V / parallel connection / I ≤ 10 A
Cable entry: 1xPg16
[3]
L1 N L1
[1]
N [2]
PE
18014398871952011

[1] Thermostat
[2] Heater
[3] Jumper
Pinst Pinst
X180 X2F / X2K / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 1.6 5 - -
X3T / X4F / X4T 1 x 1.1 4 2 x 1.1 7
X190 X2F / X2K / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 1.6 5 - -
X3T / X4F / X4T 1 x 1.1 3 - -
X200 X2K 1 x 1.6 4 - -
X2F / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 1.8 4 - -
X4F / X4T 1 x 1.3 3 - -
X3T 1 x 1.1 2 2 x 1.1 5
X210 X2K 1 x 1.6 4 - -
X2F / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 1.8 4 - -
X3T / X4F / X4T 1 x 1.3 3 - -
X220 X2K 1 x 1.8 3 - -
X2F / X3F / X4F / X3K / X4K / X3T / X4T 1 x 2.2 4 - -
230X X2K 1 x 1.8 3 - -
X240 X2K 1 x 1.8 3 - -
X250 X2K 1 x 2.2 3 - -

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater
AC voltage / 1-phase / 230 V / parallel connection / I ≥ 10 A

Cable entry: 1xPg16
N PE L1
[4]
L1 [1]
K1 [2]
N [3]
PE
9007201638328971

[1] Thermostat
[2] Contactor (not included in the delivery)
[3] Heater
[4] Jumper
Pinst Pinst
X180 X2F / X2K / X3K / X3F / X4K - - 2 x 1.6 10
X200 X2K - - 2 x 1.5 8
X2F / X3K / X3F / X4K - - 2 x 1.8 8
X4F / X4T - - 2 x 1.3 6
X220 X2K - - 2 x 1.8 7
X2F / X3F / X4F / X3K / X4K / X3T / X4T - - 2 x 2.2 8
X240 X2K - - 2 x 1.8 5
X2F / X3F / X4F / X3K / X4K / X3T / X4T - - 2 x 2.2 6
X250 X2F / X3F / X4F / X3K / X4K / X3T / X4T 1 x 2.6 3 - -

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater 5
Three-phase current / 3-phase / 30/400 V / star connection
The following figure shows the connection that results from removing the jumpers that
are plugged in upon delivery (view of the connection space):
Cable entry: 1xPg16
L1 L2 L3
L1 N PE [1]
L2
L3 K1 [2]
N [3]
PE
[4]
9007201665362955

[1] Thermostat
[3] Heater
[4] Jumper (modified delivery condition)
Pinst Pinst
X180 X2F / X2K / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 1.6 5 2 x 1.6 10
X3T / X4F / X4T 1 x 1.1 4 2 x 1.1 7
X190 X2F / X2K / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 1.6 5 - -
X3T / X4F / X4T 1 x 1.1 3 - -
X200 X2K 1 x 1.6 4 2 x 1.6 8
X2F / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 1.8 5 2 x 1.8 8
X4F / X4T 1 x 1.3 3 2 x 1.3 6
X3T 1 x 1.1 2 2 x 1.1 5
X210 X2K 1 x 1.6 4 - -
X2F / X3K / X3F / X4K 1 x 1.8 4 - -
X3T / X4F / X4T 1 x 1.3 3 - -
X220 X2K 1 x 1.8 3 2 x 1.8 7
X2F / X3F / X4F / X3K / X4K / X3T / X4T 1 x 2.2 4 2 x 2.2 8
X230 X2K 1 x 1.8 3 - -
X240 X2K 1 x 1.8 3 2 x 1.8 5
X2F / X3F / X4F / X3K / X4K / X3T / X4T 1 x 2.2 3 2 x 2.2 6
X250 X2K 1 x 2.2 3 - -

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil heater
AC voltage / 2-phase / 400 V / parallel connection

Cable entry: 1xPg16
L1 L2
L1
[1]
PE
[2] K1
[3]
[4] L2
18014399799442443

[1] Thermostat
[3] Heater
[4] Jumper
Pinst Pinst
X260 X2F / X3F / X4F / X3K / X4K / 1 x 3.8 4 2 x 3.8 8
X270 X3T / X4T 1 x 3.8 4 - -
X280 1 x 4.2 4 - -
X290 1 x 4.2 3 2 x 4.2 6
X300 1 x 4.2 3 - -
X310 1 x 5.0 3 2 x 5.0 6
X320 1 x 5.0 3 - -

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Pressure switch /PS 5
5.31 Pressure switch /PS
The pressure switch indicates the correct oil pressure in the pressure pipe and in this
way indicates the operational readiness of pressure lubrication. The pressure switch
must be monitored by the operator.
During the starting phase of a gear unit with shaft end pump, pressure might build up
with a delay. The slow building up of pressure during this phase can cause the pres-
sure switch to issue a fault signal. You can prevent this by timing the pressure switch
to 5 seconds up to a maximum of 10 seconds.
Another switch-off delay is not permitted as this might damage the gear unit.
5.31.1 Dimensions
92
9
SW 27
Ø 34.4
33.5
51
50.7
G 1/4"
721994635
5.31.2 Electrical connection

2 4
P
1
722003723
[1][2] NC contact
[1][4] NO contact
5.31.3 Technical data

• Switching pressure 0.5 ± 0.2 bar
• Maximum switching capacity 4 A - VAC 250; 4 A - VDC 24
• Plug connector DIN EN 175301-803
• The tightening torque for the retaining screw in the back of the plug connector for
electrical connection is 0.25 Nm
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Temperature sensor /PT100
5.32 Temperature sensor /PT100

5.32.1 Dimensions
A 24 PG9, PG11
35
Ø8
34
G1/2
18014398868636427
A [mm]
50
150
3
2 1
359158539
[1][2] Resistor element connection

• Design with thermowell and changeable measuring insert
• Sensor tolerance [K] ± (0.3 + 0.005 x T), (corresponds to DIN IEC 751 class B),
T = Oil temperature [°C]
• Plug connector: DIN EN 175301-803 PG9 (IP65)
electrical connection is 0.25 Nm.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Temperature switch /NTB 5
5.33 Temperature switch /NTB
5.33.1 Dimensions
14 70
1.5 17
Ø 26.8
51
G1/2"
9007199621265931

To guarantee a long service life and trouble-free functioning, we recommend that you
use a relay in the power circuit instead of a direct connection through the temperature
switch.
[1]
[2]
[3]
366532491
[1][3] NC contact (without vacuum)

[2] Grounding terminal 6.3 x 0.8

• Trigger temperature: 70°C, 80°C, 90°C, 100°C ± 5°C
• Contact capacity: 10 A - AC 240 V
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Temperature switch /TSK
5.34 Temperature switch /TSK

5.34.1 Dimensions
L=80 57
16
G3/4
Ø20
SW36
893872779

To guarantee a long service life and trouble-free functioning, we recommend that you
use a relay in the power circuit instead of a direct connection through the temperature
switch.
TKS 60 °C
1 2
TKS 90 °C
PE
27021598658101131
[1][2] Switch 60 °C NO contact

[1][3] Switch 90 °C NC contact
PE Grounding terminal

• Switching temperatures: 60 °C and 90 °C
• Contact capacity: 2 A - AC 240 V
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil filter 5
5.35 Oil filter
INFORMATION
Observe the operating instructions of the oil filter manufacturer.
[1]
15800209419
[1] Oil filter
5.36 Brake
INFORMATION
The brake is not set at the factory.
Observe the operating instructions of the respective brake manufacturer.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
6 Startup
Important notes
6 Startup
6.1 Important notes
NOTICE
Improper startup may result in damage to the gear unit.
• Fill the gear unit with the oil grade specified on the nameplate. The oil quantity
specified on the nameplate is an approximate quantity. The mark on the oil dipstick
or the oil level glass is the decisive indicator of the correct oil quantity. When the
gear unit is equipped with an oil dipstick and an oil sight glass, refer to the oil dip-
stick for the correct oil level. For additional information, refer to chapter "Checking
the oil level" (→ 2 220) and chapter "Changing the oil" (→ 2 228).
unit, the oil fill quantity is higher. In this case, observe the respective SEW operat-
ing instructions "Oil Supply System".
Check the oil level again after a few operating hours, see chapter "Checking the oil
level".
• The most important technical data is provided on the nameplate. Additional data
relevant for operation is available in drawings, on the order confirmation or any or-
der-specific documentation.
• Prior to startup, make sure that monitoring devices (such as pressure switch, tem-
perature switch) are fully operational.
• As of size X..220 and for X2F..180 – 210, avoid no-load operation independent of
the driven machine because operation with a load below the minimum load can
damage the rolling bearings of the gear unit.
• After having installed the gear unit, check to see that all retaining screws are tight.
• Make sure that the alignment has not changed after tightening the mounting ele-
ments.
• Prior to startup, ensure that rotating shafts as well as couplings are equipped with
suitable protective covers.
• If there are any oil drain valves, ensure that they cannot be opened unintentionally.
• If an oil level glass is used for checking the oil level, ensure that it is protected
against damage.
• It is essential that there is no open fire or risk of sparks when working on the gear
unit.
• Make sure that the gear unit is grounded. Electrical mount-on components, such
as motors, frequency inverters, etc. must be grounded separately.
• Protect the gear unit from falling objects.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• If the gear unit is equipped with a fan on the input shaft, check for free air intake
within the specified angle.
• Ensure that the external coolant supply is guaranteed for gear units with circulation
cooling, water cooling covers and water cooling cartridges.
• When operated in areas with low ambient temperatures, observe the limit temper-
ature for gear unit startup. Allow for a sufficient heating period.
Startup
• Gear units with pressure lubrication may only be taken into operation when the
pressure switch is connected.
• For gear units with long-term protection: Replace the screw plug at the location in-
dicated on the gear unit with a breather plug (position → see order documents).
• Remove transport protection prior to startup.
• Strictly observe the safety notes in the individual chapters!
NOTICE
Improper startup of gear units with pressure lubrication can damage the gear unit.
• Do not start up the gear unit if the pressure switch is not connected.
• It is essential that the gear unit is sufficiently lubricated from the very beginning.
Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if the pump does not build up pressure within 20
seconds after the gear unit has been started up.
• A minimum speed of ≥ 400 1/min is required for proper operation of the shaft end
pump. If you use variable input speeds (e.g. inverter-controlled drives) or if you in-
tend to change the input speed of a gear unit equipped with a shaft end pump, it is
essential that you contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• An oil heater is mandatory when operating gear units with shaft end pump at low
ambient temperatures. For further information, refer to chapter ""Limit temperature
for gear unit start" (→ 2 192)".
• Observe the notes in chapter "Filling the gear unit with oil".
6.3 Motor pump /ONP
INFORMATION
Before startup, first read the addendum to the operating instructions "Motor Pump /
ONP", which includes the manufacturer's documentation.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the system due to power loss.
22299017/EN – 10/2015

• A power loss may result from the formation of scale on the inside of the pipe.
Refer to chapter "Inspection/Maintenance".
6 Startup
NOTICE
Risk of damage to components caused by aggressive cooling media, such as sea
water or brackish water.
• Sea water or brackish water and other caustic fluids must not be used as cooling
media for the standard models. Special materials are necessary when using
these aggressive cooling media.
After having installed the water cooling cover in the system, it can be taken into opera-
tion and operated without taking further preparatory measures. After startup, check the
water cooling cover for proper function.
Make the following checks:
• Check the connection points for tightness.
• If necessary, check the valves, fittings, and filters for unrestricted flow and proper
functioning.
• Check for proper function of the water cooling cover.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the system due to power loss.
• A power loss may result from the formation of scale on the inside of the pipe.
Refer to chapter "Inspection/Maintenance".
NOTICE
Risk of damage to components caused by aggressive cooling media, such as sea
water or brackish water.
• Sea water or brackish water and other caustic fluids must not be used as cooling
media for the standard models. Special materials are necessary when using
these aggressive cooling media.
After having installed the water cooling cartridge in the system, it can be taken into op-
eration and operated without taking further preparatory measures. After startup, check
the water cooling cartridge for proper function.
Make the following checks:
• Check the connection points for tightness.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• If necessary, check the valves, fittings, and filters for unrestricted flow and proper
functioning.
• Check for proper function of the water cooling cartridge.
Startup
Oil-water cooler with motor pump for splash lubrication /OWC 6
6.6 Oil-water cooler with motor pump for splash lubrication /OWC
INFORMATION
"Oil-Water Cooler with Motor Pump for Splash Lubrication /OWC", which includes the
manufacturer's documentation.
6.7 Oil-air cooler with motor pump for splash lubrication /OAC
INFORMATION
Before startup, first read the addendum to the operating instructions "Oil-Air Cooler
with Motor Pump for Splash Lubrication /OAC", which includes the manufacturer's
documentation.
INFORMATION
Before startup, first read the addendum to the operating instructions "Oil-Water
Cooler for Pressure Lubrication / OWP", which includes the manufacturer's docu-
mentation.
6.9 Oil-air cooler with motor pump for pressure lubrication /OAP
INFORMATION
Before startup, first read the addendum to the operating instructions "Oil-Air Cooler
with Motor Pump for Pressure Lubrication /OAP", which includes the manufacturer's
documentation.
6.10 Oil heater /OH
NOTICE
Malfunctioning oil heater when changing the mounting position.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
SEW‑EURODRIVE, otherwise proper functioning is no longer ensured.
The oil heater comes equipped with cable glands and jumpers. They are included in
the delivery of the heating elements and are already installed in the gear unit. The oil
heater is connected to the current supply using terminal studs. They do not depend on
the size of the heating element and always have an M4 thread. We recommend using
RKS4 ring cable lugs with small grommets.
6 Startup
Backstop /BS
6.10.1 Positioning the thermostat

The required position of the thermostat may vary depending on the installation space.
Proceed as follows to position the thermostat:
1. Open the clamping screws [2].
2. Turn the thermostat to the required position.
NOTICE
Observe the position of the cable gland during assembly.
• Mount it in such a way that no moisture can enter.
3. Tighten the clamping screws [2].
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
2338432139
[1] Threaded jacket

[2] Clamping screw
[3] Thermostat
[4] Cable gland
A protective sleeve prevents oil from leaking. The sensor of the thermostat is inserted
in the sleeve and attached via the 2 clamping screws.
6.11 Backstop /BS
NOTICE
Operating the motor in the blocking direction might destroy the backstop.
Possible damage to property
• The motor may not be operated in blocking direction. Ensure a correct current
supply to the motor, so that it rotates in the required direction. Operating the mo-
22299017/EN – 10/2015
tor in the blocking direction might destroy the backstop.

• Observe the "Addendum to the operating instructions" when you change the
blocking direction.
The direction of rotation is specified as viewed onto the output shaft (LSS):
• CW rotation
• CCW rotation
Startup
Starting up the gear unit at low ambient temperatures 6
The permitted direction of rotation [1] is indicated on the housing.
[1]
[1]
CCW CW
199930635
6.12 Starting up the gear unit at low ambient temperatures
NOTICE
Starting up the gear unit below the permitted minimum oil temperature for gear unit
startup may damage the unit.
• Prior to starting up the gear unit, make sure that the oil heater heats up the oil to
the temperature specified for "without heater".
6.13 Gear unit shutdown / gear unit conservation
WARNING
INFORMATION
Gear units with water cooling system: disrupt the cooling water supply and drain the
water from the cooling circuit. Gear units with oil supply system: Please contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Additional conservation measures are required if the gear unit is to be shut-down for a
22299017/EN – 10/2015
longer period. Depending on the location, the ambient conditions, and the lubrication
state, even a few weeks of downtime might require conservation measures.
6.13.1 Internal conservation
• New or hardly used gear units:
– For internal conservation, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends the VCI conserva-
tion method.
6 Startup
Gear unit shutdown / gear unit conservation
– Apply the required amount of VCI anti-corrosion agent to the inside of the gear
unit (e.g. FUCHS LUBRITECH Anticorit VCI UNI IP-40, www.fuchs-lub-
ritech.com). The amount depends on the free space inside the gear unit. Any
existing oil may usually remain in the drive.
– Replace the breather filter with a screw plug and close the gear unit so that it is
air tight. Prior to startup, re-install the breather filter.
• After longer gear unit operation:
– The oil might be contaminated (oil sludge, water, etc.) after long periods of op-
eration. Therefore, drain the oil and thoroughly rinse the inside of the gear unit
with new oil prior to conservation. Observe the information in chapter "Chan-
ging the oil" (→ 2 228) in the corresponding operating instructions. The inside
of the gear unit can then be conserved as described above.
INFORMATION
For gear units with contactless sealing systems, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
For gear units without contactless sealing systems, you may also use the oil type in-
dicated on the nameplate to perform the conservation. In this case, the gear unit
must be completely filled with clean oil. Replace the breather filter with a screw plug
and fill in the oil from the highest point of the gear unit. In order to provide for suffi-
cient conservation, all the gearing components and bearing points must be com-
pletely covered in oil.
Prior to startup, re-install the breather filter. Only use the oil grade specified on the
nameplate.
6.13.2 External corrosion protection

• Clean the respective surfaces.
• Grease the shaft near the sealing lip to separate the sealing lip of the oil seal and
the anti-corrosion agent.
• Apply a wax-based protective coating to shaft ends and unpainted surfaces as ex-
ternal corrosion protection (e.g. Herm. Hölterhoff Hölterol MF 1424,
www.hoelterhoff.de).
INFORMATION
Consult the respective supplier regarding the compatibility with the oil that is used
and the length of corrosion protection for your particular gear unit version.
Observe the information in chapter "Storage and Transport Conditions" in the corres-
ponding operating instructions. This chapter provides information on the possible
storage periods in conjunction with adequate packaging – depending on the storage
location.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Inspection/maintenance
Preliminary work regarding inspection and maintenance 7
7 Inspection/maintenance
7.1 Preliminary work regarding inspection and maintenance
Observe the following notes before you start with inspection/maintenance work.
WARNING
WARNING
A customer machine that is not appropriately secured can fall during gear unit in-
stallation or removal.
• Protect the operator’s machine against unintentional movement when installing
or removing the gear unit.
WARNING
Serious injury.
NOTICE
Filling in the wrong oil may result in significantly different lubricant characteristics.
• Do not mix different synthetic lubricants and do not mix synthetic and mineral lub-
ricants.
NOTICE
Improper maintenance may result in damage to the gear unit.
• Strict adherence to the inspection and maintenance intervals is absolutely neces-

sary to ensure safe working conditions.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• When using primary gearmotors, also observe the maintenance notes for motors
and primary gear units in the accompanying operating instructions.
• Use only original spare parts according to the delivered spare and wearing parts
list.
Inspection and maintenance intervals
• If you remove the gear unit cover, you must apply new sealing compound to the
sealing surface. Otherwise, the sealing properties of the gear unit might be im-
paired. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE in this case.
• Prevent foreign particles from entering into the gear unit during maintenance and
inspection work.
• Never clean the gear unit with a high-pressure cleaning device. If one is used, wa-
ter may enter into the gear unit and the seals may be damaged.
• Replace any damaged seals.
• The gear unit must be cleaned in such a way that liquids cannot enter the motor
adapter (HSS end) or the mounting flange (LSS end) and accumulate there.
• Perform a safety and functional check following all maintenance and repair work.
• For third-party parts, such as cooling systems, observe the separate inspection
and maintenance intervals of the manufacturer's documentation.
• Strictly observe the safety notes in the individual chapters.
7.2 Inspection and maintenance intervals

Adhere to the following inspection and maintenance intervals:
Frequency What is to be done?

Daily • Check the housing temperature:
– Mineral oil: max 90 ˚C
– Synthetic oil: max 100 ˚C
• Check gear unit noise
Monthly • Check the gear unit for signs of leakage
• Check the oil level
After 500 operating hours • First oil change after initial startup
Every 6 months • Check the screw fittings and piping for leakage.
Every 3000 operating hours, at least every • Checking the oil consistency
6 months
• Fill regreasable sealing systems with grease
• For V-belt drives: Check the belt tension and condition
of the V-belt pulleys and belts
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Inspection and maintenance intervals 7
Depending on the operating conditions, at • Check whether retaining screws are tightly secured.
least every 12 months
• Check if the gear unit surface is free of dust and dirt, so
that the gear unit can be optimally cooled.
• Check the condition of the motor pump /ONP, replace
filter element if necessary.
• Check the condition of the oil-water cooler /OWC (see
addendum to the operating instructions).
• Check the condition of the oil-air cooler /OAC (see ad-
dendum to the operating instructions).
• Check the condition of the oil-water cooler /OWP, re-
place filter element if necessary (see addendum to the
operating instructions).
• Check the condition of the oil-air cooler /OAP, replace
filter element if necessary (see addendum to the oper-
ating instructions).
• Clean the oil filter, replace filter element if necessary
• Check the condition of the water cooling cartridge /CCT
• Check the condition of the water cooling cover /CCV
• Check the breather, replace them if necessary
• Check the alignment of the input and output shaft
• Check the condition and tightness of all the rubber
tubes (aging effects)
At least every 3 years depending on the • Change mineral oil
operating conditions (see figure on next
page)
At least every 5 years depending on the • Change synthetic oil
operating conditions (see figure on next
page)
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Inspection and maintenance intervals

Varying (depending on external factors) • Check the installed hose pipes
• Clean the gear unit housing surface and the fan
• Touch up or renew the surface/anticorrosion coating
• Replace backstop
The backstop might wear off when operated below lift-
off speed. This is why you should contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE for defining the maintenance inter-
vals for:
– Speed on input shaft < 950 1/min
– See backstop, chapter 4
• Check built-in cooler (such as water cooling cover /CCT
and cartridge /CCV) for deposits
• Check the oil heater /OH (at same time as the oil
change):
– Are all connecting leads and terminals tightened se-
curely and free from corrosion?
– Clean encrusted heating elements, replace if neces-
sary
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Lubricant change intervals 7
7.3 Lubricant change intervals
Change the oil more frequently when using special designs subject to more severe/ag-
gressive ambient conditions.
INFORMATION
Mineral CLP lubricants and synthetic polyalphaolefin-based (PAO) lubricants are
used for lubrication. The synthetic lubricant CLP HC (according to DIN 51502) shown
in the following illustration corresponds to the PAO oils.
30000
[h]
25000
20000
[1] [A]
CLP HC
15000
10000 [A]
CLP
5000
0
70 80 90 100 110 [°C] 120
[2]
9007199665294731
[1] Operating hours

[2] Sustained oil bath temperature
[A] Average value per oil type at 70 °C
INFORMATION
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that the gear unit oil is analyzed regularly to optim-
ize the lubricant change intervals, see "Checking the oil consistency" (→ 2 227).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Checking the oil level
7.4 Checking the oil level

Note the following when checking the oil level.
NOTICE
Improper checking of the oil level may result in damage to the gear unit.
• Check the oil level only when the gear unit is at standstill.
• For gear units in fixed and variable pivoted mounting position, observe the notes
on the following pages.
• When the gear unit is equipped with an oil dipstick and an oil sight glass, refer to
the oil dipstick for the correct oil level. The oil level of the oil sight glass is only a
guide value.
• Elements for controlling the oil level, oil drain, and oil fill openings are indicated
on the gear unit by safety symbols.
• Check the oil level again after a few operating hours.
7.4.2 Standard procedure
Oil dipstick
[1]
[1]
18014398969167243
1. Unscrew the oil dipstick and remove it.

2. Clean the oil dipstick and re-insert it by turning it hand-tight into the gear unit up to
the stop.
3. Remove the oil dipstick and check the oil level. The oil level must be between the
markings [1].
4. Proceed as follows if the oil level is too low:
• Open the oil fill plug.
• Fill in oil of the same oil grade until the oil level is between the markings [1].
22299017/EN – 10/2015
5. If you filled in too much oil, proceed as follows:

• Adjust the oil level. The oil level must be between the markings [1].
6. Screw in the oil dipstick.
Oil sight glass

Checking the oil level 7
The oil sight glass only shows the oil level. The oil level is determined using the oil
dipstick.
[1]
18014398969168907
Oil level glass

[1]
[1]
15503701131
1. The oil level must be between the markings [1].

2. Proceed as follows if the oil level is too low:
• Open the oil fill plug.
• Fill in oil of the same oil grade until the oil level is between the markings [1].
3. If you filled in too much oil, proceed as follows:
• Adjust the oil level. The oil level must be between the markings [1].
4. Screw in the oil fill plug.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
7.4.3 Procedure for gear units with oil expansion tank /ET
During operation, any oil level below or above the level specified by
SEW‑EURODRIVE is permitted as long as there is oil in the oil expansion tank [3] and
the oil expansion tank does not overflow. However, to provide for adequate lubrication
of the gear unit in any operating state, you have to check the oil level accurately on a
regular basis. This can only be carried out properly within a certain temperature range.
The following figures show the possible designs of the oil expansion tank [3].
[1]
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1] [2] [3]
15514764939
[1] Breather [3] Oil expansion tank

[2] Oil dipstick

1. Switch off the gear unit and allow it to cool down until the temperature is between
10 °C and 40 °C.
2. Check the oil level at the oil dipstick or the oil level glass. Note the chapter "Stand-
ard procedure" (→ 2 220).
22299017/EN – 10/2015
7.4.4 Notes on the procedure for fixed and variabel pivoted mounting positions
Observe the information on the nameplate and in the order documents.
Fixed pivoted mounting positions
Procedure
Check the oil level in the fixed, intended position. Observe the notes in chapter
"Standard procedure" (→ 2 220).
The following figure shows an example of how to check the oil level.
M1-M2/8°
M1-M5/30
[1] [1]
30°
8°
18014403231632011
[1] Oil dipstick

Oil
Variable pivoted mounting positions
Procedure
Before checking the oil level of gear units with variable pivoted mounting position, pos-
ition the gear unit in the mounting position defined in the order documents. Observe
the notes in chapter "Standard procedure" (→ 2 220).
M1-M4/0...-20°
[1]
[1]
0°-20°
0°
18014403231812875
22299017/EN – 10/2015
[1] Oil dipstick

Oil
Information sign
Observe the additional information sign on the gear unit. Check the oil level in the
test mounting position specified on the information sign.
The following figure shows an example of the information sign for check mounting po-
sition 0°
01.1234567812.0001.06
M1-M2 [0°]
1897 737 5
9007204944147979
sition 20°
01.1234567812.0001.06
M1-M2 [20°]
1897 737 5
9007204944161675
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Combination of fixed and variable pivoted mounting positions
Procedure
Observe the following procedure when combining fixed and variable pivoted mount-
ing position.
Before checking the oil level of gear units with variable/fixed pivoted mounting posi-
tion, position the gear unit in the mounting position defined in the order documents.
Observe the notes in chapter "Standard procedure" (→ 2 220).
M1-M4/–8°...20° M1-M5/30°
20°
-8°
30°
[1]
30°
4725461515
[1] Oil dipstick

Oil
Information sign
Observe the additional information sign on the gear unit. Check the oil level in the test
mounting position specified on the nameplate.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
sition 30°
01.1234567812.0001.06
M1-M5 [30°]
1897 737 5
9007204944186379
sition 30°
01.1234567812.0001.06
M1-M2 [20°]
M1-M5 [30°]
1897 737 5
9007204944188555
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Checking the oil consistency 7
7.5 Checking the oil consistency
Proceed as follows to check the oil consistency:
1. Determine the oil drain position and place a container underneath.
2. Slowly open the oil drain and drain some oil.
3. Close the oil drain valve.
4. Check the oil consistency:
• Check the drained oil for appearance, color, and contamination.
• If the oil sample is severely contaminated (e.g. water, color, dirt), consult a special-
ist to find out the cause.
• For more detailed information on checking the oil for water content and viscosity,
contact your lubricant manufacturer.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Changing the oil
7.6 Changing the oil

7.6.1 Notes
Observe the following when changing the oil.
WARNING
Serious injury.
NOTICE
Improper oil change may result in damage to the gear unit.
• Perform the oil change quickly after you have switched off the gear unit to prevent
solids from settling. Drain the oil while it is still warm. Avoid oil temperatures well
above 50 °C.
• Always fill the gear unit with the same oil grade as before. Mixing oils of different
grades and/or manufacturers is not permitted. Especially synthetic oils may not be
mixed with mineral oils or other synthetic oils. Flush the gear unit with the new oil
grade thoroughly when switching from mineral oil and/or when switching from syn-
thetic oil of one basis to synthetic oil of a different basis.
Refer to the lubricant table for information on the permitted oil of the various lubric-
ant manufacturers.
• The oil grade and oil viscosity are listed on the nameplate of the gear unit. The oil
quantity specified on the nameplate is an approximate quantity. The mark on the
oil dipstick or the oil level glass is the decisive indicator of the correct oil quantity.
unit, the oil fill quantity is higher. Observe the operating instructions of the oil sup-
ply system.
• When changing the oil, flush the gear unit interior thoroughly with oil to remove oil
sludge, oil residue, and abrasion. Use the same oil grade for this purpose as for
operating the gear unit. Fill in fresh oil only after all residues have been removed.
• For the position of the oil level plug, oil drain plug and breather plug, refer to the
order documents.
• An oil level above the max marking might indicate that foreign liquids (e.g. water)
have entered. An oil level below the min marking might indicate a leakage. Find
out and eliminate the cause before you fill in new oil.
• If required, empty accessories e.g. filters and pipes.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• Replace any damaged gaskets of the oil drain plug.

• If present, clean the magnetic oil drain plugs and the oil dipstick with magnet tip.
• Empty the oil-bearing system of gear units with circulation lubrication and oil sup-
ply systems according to the manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
• Elements for controlling the oil level, oil drain, and oil fill openings are indicated on
the gear unit by safety symbols.
Changing the oil 7
• Remove any dripping oil immediately with oil binding agent. Dispose of the used oil
in accordance with applicable regulations.
7.6.2 Basic gear unit

[2]
[1]
4605382667
Observe the notes in chapter "Preliminary work regarding inspection and mainten-
ance" (→ 2 215).
1. Place a suitable container underneath the oil drain [1].
2. Remove the oil fill plug(s) [2] / breather.
3. Open the oil drain valve [1] and drain all the oil into the container.
4. Close the oil drain valve [1].
5. Fill in new oil of the same grade through the oil filling hole [2].
• The oil quantity specified on the nameplate is an approximate quantity. The mark
on the oil dipstick or oil level glass is the decisive indicator of the correct oil quant-
ity, see chapter "Checking the oil level" (→ 2 220).
6. If present, insert the oil fill plug(s) [2] / breather and the oil dipstick.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Changing the oil
7.6.3 Gear units with oil expansion tank /ET

The following figure shows an example of a gear unit with oil expansion tank in mount-
ing position M5.
[3] [2] [5]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[1]
15645122571
1. Remove the oil drain plug(s) or open the oil drain valve [1].
INFORMATION
The oil drains faster if the upper closing elements, such as oil dipstick [2], breather [3]
or screw plugs [4] are removed and when the oil change is performed when the gear
unit is warm.
2. Place a suitable container underneath the oil drain plug(s) or the oil drain valve [1].
3. Drain all the oil into the container.
4. Close the oil drain plug(s) or oil drain valve [1].
5. Open the oil fill plugs. Observe the mounting position and the following notes.
Mounting positions M1 and M3:
[6]
[6]
22299017/EN – 10/2015
9007202583734923
6. Open at least one of the screw plugs [6] located on the side in the upper fifth
(marked gray) of the gear unit housing.
Changing the oil 7
[6]
9007202581407371
7. Open at least one of the screw plugs [6] on the top or at least one of the screw
plugs [6] located on the side in the upper fifth (marked gray) of the gear unit hous-
ing.
[6]
[6]
[5]
3326671243
8. Open all accessible screw plugs [6] on the top of the gear unit housing and all ac-
cessible screw plugs located on the side in the upper fifth (marked gray) of the
gear unit housing.
INFORMATION
In case of the agitator housing /HA, no screw plug needs to be opened at the top of
the gear unit. The gear unit is vented via the breather and the oil filling hole.
9. Fill in oil of the same type through one of the housing openings [6] or the oil expan-
22299017/EN – 10/2015
sion tank [5]. If oil leaks from an opening, close the opening and keep filling the
gear unit until the specified oil level is reached in the oil expansion tank [5].
Changing the oil
INFORMATION
Preheat the oil to max. 40 °C to accelerate the filling process.
You can also use a pump to fill the gear unit.
During the filling process, the oil level in the oil expansion tank [5] must never in-
crease to a point that oil leaks from the expansion tank [5] into the breather pipes.
10. Close all openings [6] of the gear unit housing and the oil expansion tank [5].
11. Check the breather [3] for proper functioning before you install it.
12. Screw in the oil dipstick [2].
13. Start up the gear unit.
14. Until the gear unit has reached the operating temperature, check the oil level at
least every 30 minutes and fill in more oil if required.
15. Allow the gear unit to cool down to a temperature between 10 °C and 40 °C and
check the oil level again. Fill in more oil if required.
INFORMATION
Usually, trapped air escapes from the gear unit during the initial operating hours so
that you have to fill in more oil.
7.6.4 Gear units with shaft end pump /SEP
INFORMATION
• Read the manufacturer's documentation first before beginning inspection/mainten-
ance work.
• Observe the notes in chapter ""Preliminary work for inspection/mainten-
ance"" (→ 2 215).
• Observe the chapter "Installation/Assembly".
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Checking and cleaning the breather 7
7.7 Checking and cleaning the breather
NOTICE
Improper cleaning of the breather may damage the gear unit.
• Prevent foreign particles from entering into the gear unit when performing the fol-
lowing work.

1. Remove any deposits near the breather.
2. If the breather is clogged, replace it.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Refilling sealing grease
7.8 Refilling sealing grease
WARNING
Risk of crushing due to rotating parts.
• Make sure to provide for sufficient safety measures for relubrication.

Regreasable sealing systems may be filled with "lithium soap grease" (→ 2 267). Use
moderate pressure to force about 30 g of grease into each lubrication point until new
grease leaks out of the sealing gap.
Used grease, including contaminants and sand, is in this way pressed out of the seal-
ing gap.
INFORMATION
Immediately remove the old grease that leaked out.
7.9 Relubricating the bearing for drywell sealing systems
WARNING
Risk of crushing due to rotating parts.
• Make sure to provide for sufficient safety measures during relubrication.
NOTICE
High pressure forces the grease out between the sealing lip and the shaft. The seal-
ing lip might be damaged or slip, grease might seep into the workflow.
• Fill the grease while the gear unit is running by carefully pressing in the required
quantity.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Relubricating the bearing for drywell sealing systems 7
7.9.1 Universal housing HU / horizontal housing HH / thermal housing HT
[2] [3]
ON
[1]
OFF
[4]
18014399247940619

1. Remove the screw plug [1] at the grease drain pipe [4]. Thus, the old excess
grease can escape.
2. Remove the protection cap [2]. Fill in the grease via the flat grease nipple
(DIN 3404 A G1/8) [3]. Lubricant quantities according to the following table. For
lubricants you can use, refer to chapter ""Sealing greases"" (→ 2 267).
Size Amount of Size Amount of Size Amount of
grease [g] grease [g] grease [g]
X120 50 X180 – X190 110 X260 300
X130 – X140 60 X200 – X210 200 X270 -– X280 450
X150 70 X220 – X230 200 X290 – X300 400
X110 – X170 90 X240 – X250 300 X310 – X320 550
3. Place the protection cap [2] on the flat grease nipple [3].
4. Screw the screw plug [1] in the grease drain pipe [4].
INFORMATION
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Motor pump /ONP
7.9.2 Agitator housing HA
[2]
[3]
ON
[1]
OFF
15934764427

1. Remove the screw plug [1]. Thus, the old excess grease can escape.
2. Remove the protection cap [2]. Fill the grease via the grease nipple [3]. Lubricant
quantities according to the following table. For lubricants you can use, refer to
chapter ""Sealing greases"" (→ 2 267).
Size Amount of grease [g] Size Amount of grease [g]
X140 120 X110 – X170 180
X150 140 X200 – X210 400
3. Place the protection cap [2] on the grease nipple [3].

4. Insert the screw plug [1].
INFORMATION
7.10 Motor pump /ONP

22299017/EN – 10/2015
INFORMATION
Before inspection/maintenance, first read the addendum to the operating instructions
"Motor pump /ONP" including the manufacturer's documentation.
Observe the notes in chapter ""Preliminary work for inspection/mainten-
ance"" (→ 2 215).
Observe the procedure described in chapter "Installation/Assembly" and the manufac-
turer's documentation.
7.12 Fan /FAN

1. Remove the fan guard.
2. Remove any dirt from the fan wheel, fan guard and protective grid using a hard
brush, for example.
3. Before starting the fan again, make sure the fan guard is mounted properly. The
fan must not touch the fan guard.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Axial fan
7.13 Axial fan
CAUTION
The protection cover can slip during assembly and disassembly.
• Secure the protection cover against slipping during assembly and disassembly.
NOTICE
Improper assembly of the fan guard after disassembly (e.g. for inspection purposes)
may result in damage to the fan.
• The re-assembly of the protection cover may only be performed with original
parts from SEWEURODRIVE. The specified distance to the fan must be ob-
served. If the distance is not observed, the axial fan may touch the protection
cover. Do not disconnect the axial fan from the fan hub. This may only be per-
formed by qualified personnel.
7.13.1 Removing the protection cover half

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Axial fan 7
1. Protection cover half
[1]
[2] [2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
13270713483
1. Loosen the 2 screws [1].

5. Remove protection cover half A.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Axial fan

[1]
[1]
13272061707

2. Remove protection cover half BCD.
7.13.2 Mounting the protection cover half

22299017/EN – 10/2015
Axial fan 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
13276191371
1. Screw metal sheet C and protection cover half B to the gear unit using the screws
[1].
2. Screw in the 2 screws [2].

1. Screw protection cover half A using the 2 screws [1].
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Axial fan

[2] [1] [2]
[1]
13276194187
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Axial fan 7
4. Screw metal sheet D using the 4 screws [4].
[3]
[4]
13276965003
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Water cooling cover /CCV

7.14.1 Safety notes
WARNING
Risk of burns due to media under pressure and hot component parts.
Serious injury.
• Unpressurize all systems before carrying out any disassembly work on the water
cooling cover. Safeguard the systems according to the applicable accident pre-
vention regulations.
• Risk of burns when touching hot parts (such as supply lines) of the water cooling
cover. Let the parts cool down before you remove the water cooling cover and
the supply lines.
NOTICE
Risk of damaging components of the water cooling cover.
• For information on suitable cleaning agents, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Properly vent the water cooling cover and the connected systems before taking
them into operation again.
NOTICE
Risk of contamination of the medium.
• According to experience, it is not possible to remove the cleaning agent without
any residues. It is therefore important that you select only cleaning agents that
are compatible with the medium.
NOTICE
Risk of destroying components of the water cooling cover.
• To prevent damage resulting from improper handling of the functional compon-
ents, always contact SEW‑EURODRIVE before you use other comparable, ag-
gressive cleaning agents.
NOTICE
Risk of contamination due to drained media.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
• Drain media in such a way that it is not discharged into the soil or sewage sys-
tem. Drain media in suitable containers and dispose of them according to the ap-
plicable environmental regulations.
7.14.2 Disassembly
1. Remove the cooling water inflow and return lines from the water cooling cover.
2. Open the inspection cover.
3. Carefully remove the water cooling cover and the gasket.
4. Check the water cooling cover for deposits.
INFORMATION
Clean light dirt on the water cooling cover with a suitable cleaning agent. If heavily
soiled, replace the water cooling cover with a new one. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
5. Insert the water cooling cover into the gear unit housing.
6. Apply Loctite® 5188 over the entire edge of the cooling cover.
7. Insert the gasket.
8. Place the inspection cover onto the gear unit and align it.
9. Reinsert the screws and tighten them in two goes starting from the inside. Observe
chapter "Tightening torques".
10. Re-connect the water cooling inflow and return pipes to the water cooling cover.
22299017/EN – 10/2015

INFORMATION
Do not carry out any repair work on the pipe bundle of the water cooling cartridge un-
less in case of an emergency. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE in that case. Analyze the
situation and report the failure symptoms.
7.15.1 Maintenance intervals

The service life of the water cooling cartridge depends to a large degree on the quality
of the media and their substances. The operator is responsible for specifying the
maintenance intervals. Use the performance parameters and power rating determined
during operation to define the maintenance intervals.
Specify the maintenance intervals in such a way that a power loss of the water cooling
cartridge does not pose a hazard to the operation of the system.
7.15.2 Cleaning
Use the performance parameters and power rating determined during operation to
define the cleaning intervals. Specify the intervals in such a way that a power loss of
the water cooling cartridge does not pose a hazard to the operation of the system.
Safety notes
WARNING
Risk of burns due to media under pressure and hot component parts.
Serious injury.
• Unpressurize all systems before carrying out any disassembly work on the water
cooling cartridge. Safeguard the systems according to the applicable accident
prevention regulations.
• Risk of burns when touching hot parts (such as supply lines) of the water cooling
cartridge. Let the parts cool down before you remove the water cooling cartridge
and the supply lines.
WARNING
Cleaning the water cooling cartridge with cleaning agents such as hydrochloric acid
and comparable cleaning agents can pose a risk of chemical burn to parts of the
body and the eyes if the applicable work safety regulations are not adhered to.
Serious injury.
• Always adhere to the applicable work safety regulations when handling cleaning
22299017/EN – 10/2015
agents. Wear protective clothing, protective gloves and, if necessary, safety

goggles and breathing protection when working with aggressive cleaning media.
NOTICE
Risk of destroying components of the water cooling cartridge.
• To prevent damage resulting from improper handling of the water cooling cart-
ridge, always contact SEW‑EURODRIVE before you use other comparable, ag-
gressive cleaning agents.
NOTICE
Risk of contamination of the medium.
• According to experience, it is not possible to remove the cleaning agent without
any residues. It is therefore important that you select only cleaning agents that
are compatible with the medium.
NOTICE
Risk of damaging components of the water cooling cartridge.
• Properly vent the water cooling cartridge and the connected systems before tak-
ing them into operation again.
NOTICE
Risk of contamination due to drained media.
• Drain media in such a way that it is not discharged into the soil or sewage sys-
tem. Drain media in suitable containers and dispose of them according to the ap-
plicable environmental regulations.
Disassembly
1. Unpressurize the water cooling cartridge and the connected system pipes. Shut
them off with the corresponding valve.
2. Before "disassembly" (→ 2 228), drain all the gear unit oil.
3. Completely drain the cooling medium using the drain screws and/or drains
provided for this purpose.
4. Loosen the water cooling cartridge by applying torque only to the head of the hex
screw on the tube plate and remove the water cooling cartridge.
5. Remove the flat gasket. Remove any gasket residues from the sealing surface.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
NOTICE
Damage to the sealing surfaces can result in leakage.
• Be careful not to damage the sealing surface.
6. Clean the water cooling cartridge.
Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication /OWC
7. Insert a new gasket and make sure it is seated properly. If present, replace the O-
ring.
8. Apply LOCTITE® 577 to 2 threads and screw on the water cooling cartridge and
tighten the hex head screw by applying torque only to the head of the screw on the
tube plate using an adequate tool.
9. Re-connect the cooling water supply and return pipes to the water cooling cart-
ridges.
10. Fill new oil of the same type as the old oil through the oil fill plug (if you want to
change the oil type, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE customer service first).
• Fill in the oil according to the quantity specified on the nameplate. The oil quantity
specified on the nameplate is an approximate value.
• Check the oil level.
11. Before starting the system again, vent the lines.
Cleaning the inside of the water cooling cartridge

Observe the notes in the previous chapter.
NOTICE
Risk of corrosion due to scratches.
• Scratches on the inner surface of the pipe bundle can result in increased corro-
sion. Use a brush with soft bristles to clean the inner surface of the pipe bundle.
NOTICE
Risk of damaging components of the water cooling cartridge.
• For information on suitable cleaning agents, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
We recommend that you take the following measures for cleaning:

• To remove scale deposits from the inside of pipes, use a mixture of 50% hydro-
chloric acid with inhibitors and 50% water.
• To clean the inside of the pipe bundle, you can use a brush if the pipe diameter is
> 5 mm. Make sure you use a brush with soft bristles to prevent the surface from
pipe walls from being scratched.
• Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if you want to use other cleaning agents to remove
scale deposits.
• After cleaning, make sure all cleaning agents have been removed completely from
the pipes before taking the water cooling cartridge into operation again.
22299017/EN – 10/2015

Oil-air cooler for splash lubrication /OAC 7
INFORMATION
"Oil-Water Cooler for Splash Lubrication /OWC", which includes the manufacturer's
documentation.

INFORMATION
"Oil-Air Cooler for Splash Lubrication /OAC", which includes the manufacturer's docu-
mentation.

INFORMATION
"Oil-Water Cooler for Pressure Lubrication /OWP", which includes the manufacturer's
documentation.

INFORMATION
"Oil-Air Cooler for Splash Lubrication /OAP", which includes the manufacturer's docu-
mentation.
7.20 Oil heater /OH
WARNING
Danger of electric shock.
22299017/EN – 10/2015

• De-energize the oil heater before you start working on the unit.
• Secure the oil heater against unintended power-up.

1. Before disassembling the oil heater, "drain the oil completely" (→ 2 228).
Split housing
2. Disassemble the oil heater.
NOTICE

• Do not destroy the heating elements by scratching or scraping.
• Clean the tubular heating elements with solvent.
• Replace the defective heating elements.
3. Apply LOCTITE® 577 to 2 threads and screw on the oil heater and tighten the hex
head screw.
4. Screw in the oil drain plug again.
5. Fill new oil of the same type as the old oil through the oil fill plug (if you want to
change the oil type, contact the SEWEURODRIVE customer service first).
• Fill in the oil according to the quantity specified on the nameplate. The oil quantity
specified on the nameplate is an approximate value.
• Check to see that the oil level is correct, refer to chapter ""Checking the oil
level"" (→ 2 220).
6. Connect the oil heater.
7.21 Split housing

If the split gear unit housing is divided during maintenance, be sure that:
• the parting lines are sealed again carefully, and
• the screw connections are re-tightened using the tightening torques given in
chapter "tightening torques" (→ 2 97).
7.22 Oil filter
INFORMATION
Observe the operating instructions of the oil filter manufacturer.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Oil filter 7
[1]
15800209419
[1] Oil filter

22299017/EN – 10/2015
8 Lubricants
Lubricant selection
8 Lubricants
8.1 Lubricant selection
NOTICE
Selecting improper lubricants may damage the gear unit.
• The oil viscosity and type (mineral/synthetic) to be used are determined by

SEW‑EURODRIVE specifically for each order. This information is noted in the or-
der confirmation and on the gear unit's nameplate.
You must contact SEW‑EURODRIVE in case of a deviation from this specification.
This lubricant recommendation in no way represents a guarantee as to the quality
of the lubricant delivered by each respective supplier. Each lubricant manufacturer
is responsible for the quality of their product.
• Ensure that the gear unit is filled with the correct oil grade and quantity before star-
tup. Refer to the nameplate of the gear unit and the lubricant table in the following
chapter for information.
• Do not mix different synthetic lubricants and do not mix synthetic with mineral lub-
ricants.
• Check the compatibility of the greases and oils used.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Lubricants
Lubricant table 8
8.2 Lubricant table
NOTICE
Selecting improper lubricants may damage the gear unit.
• Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if you operate the unit under extreme conditions,
such as cold, heat, or if the operating conditions have changed since project
planning.
The lubricant table shows the permitted lubricants for SEW‑EURODRIVE industrial
gear units. Observe the abbreviations used, the meaning of shading, and the notes.
Symbols Designation
CLP = Mineral oil
CLP HC = Synthetic polyalphaolefin
E = Ester oil (water hazard classification 1 (German regulation: WKG 1))
= Mineral lubricant
= Synthetic lubricant
3) = Lubricants may only be used if service factor Fs ≥ 1.3
4) = Take into account critical starting behavior at low ambient temperat-
ures
6) = Ambient temperatures
= Lubricant for the food industry (food grade oil)
= Biodegradable oil (lubricant for agriculture, forestry, and water man-

Oil
agement)
22299017/EN – 10/2015
254
8
6)
Oil ISO,NLGI Mobil® FUCHS
LUBRICATION TO T A L
DIN (ISO) Sh ell TEXACO
°C -50 0 +50 +100
Lubricants
Lubricant table
Klüberoil Meropa Optigear 1100/320 Renolin CLP 320 Plus Carter EP

-10 +40 CLP CC VG 320 Mobilgear 600XP 320
GEM 1-320 N 320 Optigear BM320 Renolin High Gear 320 320
3) -20 +20 Klüberoil Meropa Optigear 1100/150 Renolin CLP 150 Plus
CLP CC VG 150 Mobilgear 600XP 150
GEM 1-150 N 150 Optigear BM150 Renolin High Gear 150
-15 +30 Klüberoil Meropa Optigear 1100/220 Renolin CLP 220 Plus Carter EP
CLPCC VG 220 Mobilgear 600XP 220
GEM 1-220 N 220 Optigear BM220 Renolin High Gear 220 220
-5 +45 Klüberoil Meropa Optigear 1100/460 Renolin CLP 460 Plus Carter EP
CLP CC VG 460 Mobilgear 600XP 460 GEM 1-460 N Optigear BM460
460 Renolin High Gear 460 460
Klüberoil Meropa Optigear 1100/680 Renolin CLP 680 Plus Carter EP

0 +50 VG 680 Mobilgear 600XP 680
CLP CC GEM 1-680 N 680 Optigear BM680 Renolin High Gear 680 680
+5 +60 CLP CC VG 1000 Optigear 1100/1000
Mobil SHC Shell Omala Alphasyn EP 320 Renolin Unisyn CLP 320
Klübersynth Pinnacle Carter SH
-25 +40 CLP HC VG 320 Gear 320 Renolin High Gear
S4 GX 320 GEM 4-320 N EP 320 Optigear Synthetic X320 320
Mobil SHC 632 Synth 320
3) -40 -10 CLP HC Mobil SHC 624

VG 32
Shell Omala Klübersynth

3) 4) -40 +10 CLP HC VG 68 Mobil SHC 626 Optigear Synthetic X68 Reolin Unisyn
S4 GX68 GEM 4-68 N
CLP 68
Mobil SHC Klübersynth Pinnacle
4) -35 +20 Shell Omala Alphasyn EP 150 Reolin Unisyn Carter SH
CLP HC VG 150 Gear 150
S4 GX 150 GEM 4-150 N EP 150 Optigear Synthetic X150 CLP 150 150
Mobil SHC 629
Mobil SHC Renolin Unisyn CLP 220
-30 +30 Shell Omala Klübersynth Pinnacle Alphasyn EP 220 Carter SH
CLP HC VG 220 Gear 220 Renolin High Gear
Mobil SHC Renolin Unisyn CLP 460
Shell Omala Klübersynth Pinnacle Alphasyn EP 460 Carter SH
-20 +50 CLP HC VG 460 Gear 460 Renolin High Gear
Mobil SHC
Shell Omala Klübersynth Pinnacle Reolin Unisyn Carter SH
-10 +60 CLP HC VG 680 Gear 680 Optigear Synthetic X680
S4 GX 680 GEM 4-680 N EP 680 CLP 680 680
Mobil SHC 636
Assembly and Operating Instructions – X.. Series Helical and Bevel-Helical Gear Units
Mobil SHC Klübersynth
0 +70 CLP HC VG 1000 Gear 1000 GEM 4-1000 N
Mobil SHC 639
Klüberöl Optileb Cassida
3) -10 +30
CLP HC VG 460 4UH1-460 N GT 460 Fluid GL 460
NSF H1
+20 Klüberöl Optileb Cassida
3) -20 VG 220 4UH1-220 N GT 220 Fluid GL 220
Klüberöl Optileb Cassida

3) 4) -40 -10 VG 68 4UH1-68 N HY 68 Fluid GL 68
Klüberbio Plantogear
-20 +40 E VG 460
Oil CA2-460 460 S
470490505
99079192137612939
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Lubricants
Horizontal housing /HH and universal housing /HU 8
8.3 Horizontal housing /HH and universal housing /HU
INFORMATION
• The specified fill quantities are recommended values. The precise values vary de-
pending on the number of stages and gear ratio.
• The mark on the oil dipstick or the oil level glass is the decisive indicator of the
correct oil quantity.
• In case of pivoted mounting positions, the lubricant fill quantity on the nameplate
may vary from the standard. The fill quantity specified on the nameplate is a guide
value. The required oil quantity depends on the respective marks on the oil dip-
stick.
8.3.1 Oil fill quantities for horizontal gear units/mounting position M1
X.F..
X2F.. Oil quantity [l] X3F.. Oil quantity [l] X4F.. Oil quantity [l]
Splash lubric- Pressure lub- Splash lubric- Pressure lub- Splash lubric- Pressure lub-
ation rication ation rication ation rication
X2F100 14 - X3F100 15 - X4F100 - -
X2F110 15 - X3F110 16 - X4F110 - -
X2F120 22 - X3F120 22 - X4F120 19 -
X2F130 24 - X3F130 25 - X4F130 19 -
X2F140 37 - X3F140 36 - X4F140 33 -
X2F150 39 - X3F150 38 - X4F150 33 -
X2F160 63 63 X3F160 61 61 X4F160 57 57
X2F170 63 63 X3F170 61 61 X4F170 57 57
X2F180 79 79 X3F180 80 80 X4F180 77 77
X2F190 83 83 X3F190 82 82 X4F190 80 80
X2F200 110 110 X3F200 110 110 X4F200 97 97
X2F210 110 110 X3F210 110 110 X4F210 97 97
X2F220 145 145 X3F220 150 150 X4F220 150 150
X2F230 145 145 X3F230 150 150 X4F230 150 150
X2F240 180 180 X3F240 180 180 X4F240 165 165
X2F250 180 180 X3F250 182 182 X4F250 172 172
X2F260 284 284 X3F260 287 287 X4F260 290 290
X2F270 285 285 X3F270 288 288 X4F270 295 295
X2F280 335 335 X3F280 350 350 X4F280 325 325
X2F290 410 410 X3F290 415 415 X4F290 415 415
X2F300 410 410 X3F300 418 418 X4F300 425 425
X2F310 555 555 X3F310 545 545 X4F310 537 537
X2F320 555 555 X3F320 545 545 X4F320 537 537
22299017/EN – 10/2015
8 Lubricants
Horizontal housing /HH and universal housing /HU
X.K..
X2K.. Oil quantity [l] X3K.. Oil quantity [l] X4K.. Oil quantity [l]
Splash lubric- Pressure Splash lubric- Pressure lub- Splash lubric- Pressure lub-
ation lubrication ation rication ation rication
X2K100 12 - X3K100 12 - X4K100 - -
X2K110 12 - X3K110 14 - X4K110 - -
X2K120 17 - X3K120 20 - X4K120 25 -
X2K130 17 - X3K130 22 - X4K130 23 -
X2K140 26 - X3K140 34 - X4K140 36 -
X2K150 29 - X3K150 34 - X4K150 39 -
X2K160 47 47 X3K160 59 59 X4K160 61 61
X2K170 47 47 X3K170 59 59 X4K170 61 61
X2K180 64 64 X3K180 74 74 X4K180 81 81
X2K190 68 68 X3K190 77 77 X4K190 84 84
X2K200 87 87 X3K200 105 105 X4K200 107 107
X2K210 87 87 X3K210 105 105 X4K210 109 109
X2K220 135 135 X3K220 135 135 X4K220 145 145
X2K230 135 135 X3K230 139 139 X4K230 145 145
X2K240 170 170 X3K240 175 175 X4K240 181 181
X2K250 170 170 X3K250 175 175 X4K250 181 181
X2K260 - - X3K260 279 279 X4K260 275 275
X2K270 - - X3K270 279 279 X4K270 275 275
X2K280 - - X3K280 330 330 X4K280 335 335
X2K290 - - X3K290 432 432 X4K290 425 425
X2K300 - - X3K300 432 432 X4K300 425 425
X2K310 - - X3K310 540 540 X4K310 545 545
X2K320 - - X3K320 540 540 X4K320 545 545
X.T..
X3T.. Oil quantity [l]] X4T.. Oil quantity [l]
Splash Pressure lub- Oil bath Splash Pressure lub- Oil bath
lubrication rication lubrication lubrication rication lubrication
X3T100 13 - - X4T100 - - -
X3T110 14 - - X4T110 - - -
X3T120 20 - - X4T120 20 - -
X3T130 21 - - X4T130 21 - -
X3T140 33 - - X4T140 31 - -
X3T150 34 - - X4T150 32 - -
X3T160 60 51 - X4T160 54 54 -
X3T170 60 51 - X4T170 54 54 -
X3T180 75 65 - X4T180 75 75 -
X3T190 75 65 - X4T190 75 75 -
X3T200 100 85 - X4T200 95 95 -
X3T210 100 85 - X4T210 95 95 -
X3T220 - 135 315 X4T220 - 205 325
X3T230 - 135 315 X4T230 - 205 325
X3T240 - 165 395 X4T240 - 260 400
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X3T250 - 165 395 X4T250 - 260 400
Lubricants
8.3.2 Lubricant fill quantities for horizontal gear units / mounting position M3
X.F..
Splash lubrication Splash lubrication Splash lubrication
X2F100 14 X3F100 14 X4F100 -
X2F110 15 X3F110 16 X4F110 -
X2F120 20 X3F120 20 X4F120 24
X2F130 22 X3F130 23 X4F130 26
X2F140 37 X3F140 38 X4F140 42
X2F150 37 X3F150 38 X4F150 42
X2F160 62 X3F160 64 X4F160 82
X2F170 62 X3F170 64 X4F170 82
X2F180 77 X3F180 78 X4F180 108
X2F190 80 X3F190 82 X4F190 105
X2F200 105 X3F200 110 X4F200 140
X2F210 105 X3F210 110 X4F210 140
X2F220 130 X3F220 145 X4F220 185
X2F230 135 X3F230 145 X4F230 185
X2F240 175 X3F240 180 X4F240 231
X2F250 175 X3F250 180 X4F250 227
X2F260 280 X3F260 275 X4F260 360
X2F270 280 X3F270 275 X4F270 360
X2F280 335 X3F280 335 X4F280 425
X2F290 410 X3F290 405 X4F290 520
X2F300 410 X3F300 405 X4F300 520
X2F310 555 X3F310 545 X4F310 690
X2F320 555 X3F320 545 X4F320 690
X.K..
Splash lubric- Splash lubric- Oil bath lub- Splash lubric-
ation ation rication ation
X2K100 12 X3K100 17 29 X4K100 -
X2K110 12 X3K110 15 29 X4K110 -
X2K120 16 X3K120 20 - X4K120 20
X2K130 17 X3K130 23 - X4K130 23
X2K140 25 X3K140 34 - X4K140 36
X2K150 28 X3K150 35 - X4K150 38
X2K160 46 X3K160 59 - X4K160 60
X2K170 46 X3K170 59 - X4K170 60
X2K180 62 X3K180 77 - X4K180 77
X2K190 64 X3K190 80 - X4K190 78
X2K200 82 X3K200 100 - X4K200 110
X2K210 82 X3K210 108 - X4K210 110
X2K220 140 X3K220 130 - X4K220 145
X2K230 140 X3K230 125 - X4K230 145
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X2K240 175 X3K240 170 - X4K240 175

X2K250 175 X3K250 170 - X4K250 180
X2K260 - X3K260 260 - X4K260 275
X2K270 - X3K270 260 - X4K270 275
X2K280 - X3K280 330 - X4K280 335
X2K290 - X3K290 405 - X4K290 415
X2K300 - X3K300 405 - X4K300 415
X2K310 - X3K310 540 - X4K310 545
8 Lubricants
Splash lubric- Splash lubric- Oil bath lub- Splash lubric-
ation ation rication ation
X2K320 - X3K320 540 - X4K320 545
X.T..
X3T.. Oil quantity [l] X4T.. Oil quantity [l]
Splash lubrica- Oil bath lub- Splash lubric- Oil bath lub-
tion rication ation rication
X3T100 - 36 X4T100 - -
X3T110 - 36 X4T110 - -
X3T120 - 46 X4T120 - 50
X3T130 - 47 X4T130 - 53
X3T140 - 79 X4T140 - 79
X3T150 - 81 X4T150 - 81
X3T160 - 139 X4T160 - 143
X3T170 - 139 X4T170 - 143
X3T180 - 175 X4T180 - 180
X3T190 - 175 X4T190 - 180
X3T200 - 235 X4T200 - 230
X3T210 - 235 X4T210 - 240
X3T220 120 - X4T220 120 -
X3T230 120 - X4T230 120 -
X3T240 155 - X4T240 155 -
X3T250 155 - X4T250 155 -
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Lubricants
8.3.3 Oil quantities for vertical gear units / mounting positions M5 and M6
Note that the oil quantity has to be increased by 20% for gear unit combinations with
mounting positions M5 or M6, pressure lubrication, and oil heating. Adhere to the in-
formation on the nameplate.
X.F..
X2F..1) Oil quantity [l] X3F..1) Oil quantity [l] X4F..1) Oil quantity [l]
Oil bath Pressure Pressure Oil bath Pressure Pressure Oil bath Pressure Pressure
lubrica- lubrica- lubrica- lubrica- lubrica- lubrica- lubrica- lubrica- lubrica-
tion tion tion with tion tion tion with tion tion tion with
Drywell Drywell Drywell
X2F100 33 - - X3F100 33 - - X4F100 - - -
X2F110 34 - - X3F110 34 - - X4F110 - - -
X2F120 48 17 - X3F120 47 17 - X4F120 43 17 -
X2F130 52 20 13 X3F130 50 20 15 X4F130 50 18 13
X2F140 79 36 - X3F140 77 38 - X4F140 74 25 -
X2F150 84 38 22 X3F150 85 36 24 X4F150 78 26 20
X2F160 157 60 - X3F160 151 58 - X4F160 142 44 -
X2F170 157 60 39 X3F170 151 58 38 X4F170 142 44 38
X2F180 185 74 51 X3F180 184 71 54 X4F180 174 66 51
X2F190 190 77 56 X3F190 190 73 56 X4F190 180 68 53
X2F200 255 110 77 X3F200 245 110 71 X4F200 235 105 70
X2F210 255 110 77 X3F210 245 110 72 X4F210 236 105 70
X2F220 340 130 97 X3F220 317 125 95 X4F220 320 155 95
X2F230 340 130 97 X3F230 317 125 95 X4F230 320 155 95
X2F240 415 160 105 X3F240 405 150 113 X4F240 415 190 115
X2F250 415 160 105 X3F250 405 150 113 X4F250 415 190 115
X2F260 - 225 197 X3F260 - 215 188 X4F260 - 255 191
X2F270 - 225 197 X3F270 - 215 188 X4F270 - 255 191
X2F280 - 270 239 X3F280 - 265 235 X4F280 - 310 235
X2F290 - 305 289 X3F290 - 300 280 X4F290 - 395 278
X2F300 - 305 289 X3F300 - 300 280 X4F300 - 395 278
X2F310 - 421 421 X3F310 - 404 404 X4F310 - 520 398
X2F320 - 421 421 X3F320 - 404 404 X4F320 - 520 398
1) In case of EBD design with universal housing, additional oil quantities must be added, as listed in the table "Additional oil quantities
for universal housing HU with extended bearing distance (EBD)".
X.K..
X2K..1) Oil quantity [l] X3K..1) Oil quantity [l] X4K..1) Oil quantity [l]
X2K100 30 - - X3K100 34 - - X4K100 - - -
X2K110 29 - - X3K110 34 - - X4K110 - - -
X2K120 41 17 - X3K120 46 17 - X4K120 46 20 -
X2K130 43 17 13 X3K130 52 18 14 X4K130 48 23 13
X2K140 61 26 - X3K140 80 34 - X4K140 77 37 -
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X2K150 64 27 19 X3K150 81 36 20 X4K150 83 38 20

X2K160 129 50 - X3K160 143 55 - X4K160 147 61 -
X2K170 129 50 34 X3K170 143 55 38 X4K170 147 61 38
X2K180 155 62 41 X3K180 177 72 55 X4K180 179 80 55
X2K190 155 62 41 X3K190 182 76 55 X4K190 188 87 55
X2K200 210 87 62 X3K200 242 97 76 X4K200 241 115 76
X2K210 210 87 62 X3K210 245 105 81 X4K210 244 115 76
X2K220 335 135 137 X3K220 320 120 91 X4K220 318 155 95
8 Lubricants
X2K..1) Oil quantity [l] X3K..1) Oil quantity [l] X4K..1) Oil quantity [l]
X2K230 335 135 137 X3K230 320 120 91 X4K230 318 155 95
X2K240 410 160 145 X3K240 405 150 99 X4K240 415 177 116
X2K250 410 160 145 X3K250 405 150 99 X4K250 415 177 116
X2K260 - - - X3K260 - 215 190 X4K260 - 280 190
X2K270 - - - X3K270 - 215 190 X4K270 - 280 190
X2K280 - - - X3K280 - 270 241 X4K280 - 350 236
X2K290 - - - X3K290 - 305 287 X4K290 - 420 281
X2K300 - - - X3K300 - 305 287 X4K300 - 420 281
X2K310 - - - X3K310 - 416 416 X4K310 - 560 413
X2K320 - - - X3K320 - 416 416 X4K320 - 560 413
Additional oil quantities for universal housing HU with extended bearing distance (EBD)
X.F.. / X.K.. Liter
140 2
150 2
160 3
170 3
180 4
190 4
200 6
210 6
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Lubricants
X.T..
Oil bath lubrica- Pressure lubric- Pressure lubric- Oil bath lubric- Pressure lub- Pressure lubric-
tion ation ation with Dry- ation rication ation with Dry-
well well
X3T100 36 - - X4T100 - - -
X3T110 36 - - X4T110 - - -
X3T120 46 17 - X4T120 50 18 -
X3T130 47 18 14 X4T130 53 22 14
X3T140 79 32 - X4T140 79 32 -
X3T150 81 33 20 X4T150 81 33 20
X3T160 139 53 - X4T160 143 55 -
X3T170 139 53 34 X4T170 143 55 34
X3T180 175 72 52 X4T180 180 82 52
X3T190 175 72 52 X4T190 180 82 52
X3T200 235 97 70 X4T200 240 110 68
X3T210 235 97 70 X4T210 240 110 68
X3T220 305 120 91 X4T220 310 150 94
X3T230 305 120 91 X4T230 310 150 94
X3T240 400 150 112 X4T240 405 190 112
X3T250 400 150 112 X4T250 405 190 112
22299017/EN – 10/2015
8 Lubricants
8.3.4 Oil quantities for vertical gear units / mounting positions M2
X.F..
Oil bath lubrication Oil bath lubrication Oil bath lubrication
X2F100 23 X3F100 20 X4F100 -
X2F110 23 X3F110 22 X4F110 -
X2F120 33 X3F120 35 X4F120 29
X2F130 36 X3F130 36 X4F130 33
X2F140 58 X3F140 56 X4F140 49
X2F150 58 X3F150 57 X4F150 49
X2F160 101 X3F160 93 X4F160 82
X2F170 101 X3F170 93 X4F170 82
X2F180 125 X3F180 125 X4F180 115
X2F190 125 X3F190 125 X4F190 115
X2F200 164 X3F200 164 X4F200 152
X2F210 164 X3F210 164 X4F210 152
X2F220 225 X3F220 207 X4F220 211
X2F230 225 X3F230 207 X4F230 211
X2F240 285 X3F240 270 X4F240 275
X2F250 285 X3F250 270 X4F250 267
X.K..
Oil bath lubrication Oil bath lubrication Oil bath lubrication
X2K100 18 X3K100 22 X4K100 -
X2K110 16 X3K110 19 X4K110 -
X2K120 26 X3K120 32 X4K120 33
X2K130 26 X3K130 32 X4K130 34
X2K140 38 X3K140 49 X4K140 54
X2K150 41 X3K150 49 X4K150 56
X2K160 64 X3K160 87 X4K160 88
X2K170 64 X3K170 87 X4K170 88
X2K180 92 X3K180 120 X4K180 125
X2K190 97 X3K190 122 X4K190 129
X2K200 130 X3K200 160 X4K200 165
X2K210 130 X3K210 160 X4K210 165
X2K220 200 X3K220 205 X4K220 220
X2K230 200 X3K230 205 X4K230 220
X2K240 255 X3K240 270 X4K240 280
X2K250 255 X3K250 270 X4K250 280
X.T..
Oil bath lubrication Oil bath lubrication
X3T100 19 X4T100 -
X3T110 19 X4T110 -
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X3T120 30 X4T120 36
X3T130 31 X4T130 36
X3T140 46 X4T140 55
X3T150 48 X4T150 59
X3T160 80 X4T160 89
X3T170 85 X4T170 94
X3T180 115 X4T180 120
X3T190 115 X4T190 120
Lubricants
Oil bath lubrication Oil bath lubrication
X3T200 150 X4T200 155
X3T210 150 X4T210 155
X3T220 205 X4T220 215
X3T230 205 X4T230 215
X3T240 265 X4T240 275
X3T250 265 X4T250 275
8.3.5 Oil quantities for vertical gear units / mounting positions M4
X.F..
Oil bath lub- Pressure lub- Oil bath lubrica- Pressure lubric- Oil bath lubrica- Pressure lub-
rication rication tion ation tion rication
X2F100 20 - X3F100 26 - X4F100 - -
X2F110 23 - X3F110 27 - X4F110 - -
X2F120 36 17 X3F120 37 17 X4F120 34 17
X2F130 37 19 X3F130 40 19 X4F130 40 19
X2F140 55 26 X3F140 65 26 X4F140 59 26
X2F150 62 27 X3F150 69 27 X4F150 59 27
X2F160 106 53 X3F160 120 53 X4F160 127 53
X2F170 106 53 X3F170 120 53 X4F170 127 53
X2F180 133 57 X3F180 155 57 X4F180 152 57
X2F190 135 57 X3F190 157 57 X4F190 152 57
X2F200 180 72 X3F200 197 72 X4F200 197 72
X2F210 180 72 X3F210 197 72 X4F210 197 72
X2F220 223 105 X3F220 263 105 X4F220 270 105
X2F230 223 105 X3F230 263 105 X4F230 270 105
X2F240 290 120 X3F240 335 120 X4F240 345 120
X2F250 290 120 X3F250 335 120 X4F250 345 120
X2F260 655 185 X3F260 630 185 X4F260 645 185
X2F270 655 185 X3F270 630 185 X4F270 645 185
X2F280 785 240 X3F280 775 240 X4F280 770 240
X2F290 955 260 X3F290 925 260 X4F290 940 260
X2F300 955 260 X3F300 925 260 X4F300 940 260
X2F310 1290 365 X3F310 1245 365 X4F310 1225 365
X2F320 1290 365 X3F320 1245 365 X4F320 1225 365
22299017/EN – 10/2015
8 Lubricants
X.K..
Oil bath lubric- Pressure lub- Oil bath lubric- Pressure lubric- Oil bath lubric- Pressure lubric-
ation rication ation ation ation ation
X2K100 30 - X3K100 34 - X4K100 - -
X2K110 29 - X3K110 34 - X4K110 - -
X2K120 41 18 X3K120 50 19 X4K120 47 18
X2K130 43 18 X3K130 53 19 X4K130 52 19
X2K140 66 26 X3K140 79 26 X4K140 82 26
X2K150 70 27 X3K150 86 29 X4K150 88 29
X2K160 136 50 X3K160 148 50 X4K160 147 50
X2K170 136 50 X3K170 148 50 X4K170 147 50
X2K180 155 57 X3K180 177 57 X4K180 188 57
X2K190 155 57 X3K190 180 57 X4K190 188 57
X2K200 210 72 X3K200 239 75 X4K200 255 72
X2K210 210 72 X3K210 239 75 X4K210 255 72
X2K220 335 105 X3K220 320 105 X4K220 335 105
X2K230 335 105 X3K230 320 105 X4K230 335 105
X2K240 410 120 X3K240 405 120 X4K240 415 120
X2K250 410 120 X3K250 405 120 X4K250 415 120
X2K260 - - X3K260 615 185 X4K260 630 185
X2K270 - - X3K270 615 185 X4K270 630 185
X2K280 - - X3K280 750 240 X4K280 775 240
X2K290 - - X3K290 930 260 X4K290 965 260
X2K300 - - X3K300 930 260 X4K300 965 260
X2K310 - - X3K310 1250 365 X4K310 1260 365
X2K320 - - X3K320 1250 365 X4K320 1260 365
X.T..
Oil bath lubrication Pressure lubrication Oil bath lubrica- Pressure lubrication
tion
X3T100 23 - X4T100 - -
X3T110 23 - X4T110 - -
X3T120 33 17 X4T120 37 17
X3T130 34 17 X4T130 39 17
X3T140 49 25 X4T140 54 25
X3T150 59 29 X4T150 55 29
X3T160 92 50 X4T160 95 50
X3T170 92 50 X4T170 95 50
X3T180 125 57 X4T180 130 57
X3T190 125 57 X4T190 130 57
X3T200 165 72 X4T200 165 72
X3T210 165 72 X4T210 165 72
X3T220 220 105 X4T220 220 105
X3T230 220 105 X4T230 220 105
X3T240 275 120 X4T240 290 120
22299017/EN – 10/2015
X3T250 275 120 X4T250 290 120
Lubricants
Thermal housing /HT 8
8.4 Thermal housing /HT
8.4.1 Oil quantities / mounting position M1
INFORMATION
stick.
X.K..
X3K.. Oil quantity [l]
Splash lubrication Pressure lubrication
X3K180 117 117
X3K190 117 117
X3K200 165 165
X3K210 165 165
X3K220 229 229
X3K230 229 229
X3K240 308 308
X3K250 297 297
X3K260 480 480
X3K270 480 480
X3K280 555 555
X3K290 735 735
X3K300 735 735
X3K310 1020 1020
X3K320 1020 1020
22299017/EN – 10/2015
8 Lubricants
8.5 Agitator housing /HA

8.5.1 Oil quantities / mounting position M5
INFORMATION
stick.
X.F..
X3F.. Oil quantity [l]
Oil bath lubrication Pressure lubrication Pressure lubrication with
Drywell
X3F140 112 61 61
X3F150 119 66 66
X3F160 176 92 92
X3F170 183 96 96
X3F180 259 133 133
X3F190 265 137 137
X3F200 391 202 202
X3F210 396 207 207
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Lubricants
Sealing greases / rolling bearing greases 8
8.6 Sealing greases / rolling bearing greases
The table shows the grease types recommended by SEW‑EURODRIVE for operating
temperatures from -40 °C to 100 °C.
Hersteller Fette
Fuchs Renolit CX TOM 15 OEM1)
Castrol Spheerol EPL 2
Klüber Petamo GHY 133 N
Standard
Shell Gadus S2 V220 2
Texaco Mulifak EP2
Total Multis EP 2
Bremer & Leguil Cassida Grease GTS21)
Fuchs Plantogel 21)

Oil
1) Grease used by the factory should be preferred.
INFORMATION
• The greases may only be interchanged within the same group. It is not permitted
to mix different groups.
• If an operator wants to use a grease that is not listed in the table, the operator has
to make sure that it is suitable for the intended application..
22299017/EN – 10/2015
9 Malfunctions/remedy
Troubleshooting information
9.1 Troubleshooting information
Read the following notes before you proceed with troubleshooting.
WARNING
WARNING
Serious injury.
NOTICE
Improper handling of the gear unit and the motor may lead to damage.
• Only qualified personnel is permitted to separate drive and motor and to carry out
repair work on SEW drives.
• Please contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Malfunctions/remedy
Possible malfunctions/remedy 9
9.2 Possible malfunctions/remedy
Fault Possible cause Measure
Unusual noise in the • Gear unit mounting has loosened • Tighten retaining screws and nuts to
area where the gear the specified torque
unit is mounted
• Replace the damaged/defective retain-
ing screws or nuts
Operating temperature • Too much oil • Check oil level, correct if necessary
too high
• Oil too old • Check when the oil was last changed;
change the oil, if necessary
• The oil is heavily contaminated • Analyze the oil to determine the cause;
take measures, if necessary; change
the oil
• Ambient temperature too high • Protect the gear unit from external heat
sources (e.g. provide shade)
• Gear units with fan: Air intake • Check air intake openings, clean them
opening/gear unit housing con- if necessary; clean the gear unit hous-
taminated ing
• For gear units with built-in cool- • Check the cooling liquid flow rate;
ing: Cooling liquid flow rate too check the entry temperature of the
low; cooling liquid temperature cooling liquid; clean the cooling system
too high; deposits in cooling sys-
tem
• Malfunction of the oil-air or oil- • Observe the separate operating instruc-
water cooling system tions for the oil-water and oil-air cooling
system.
• Malfunction in the water cooling • Check the cooling water throughput
(water cooling cover, water cool- and the entry temperature of the cool-
ing cartridge) ing water, clean the cooling system
Temperature at bearing • Not enough oil • Check oil level, correct if necessary
points too high
• Oil too old • Check when the oil was last changed;
change the oil, if necessary
• Bearing damaged • Check the bearing and replace it if ne-
cessary. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Oil leaking • Seal not tight at: • Tighten the bolts on the respective
– Cover plate cover. Observe the gear unit. Contact
• From cover plate
SEW‑EURODRIVE if oil is still leaking
• From inspection – Inspection cover
cover – Bearing cover
• From bearing cover – Mounting flange
• From mounting
22299017/EN – 10/2015
flange
Oil leaking1) • Too much oil • Check oil level, correct if necessary
• From oil seal • Sealing lip of the oil seal turned • Vent the gear unit, observe the gear
up unit. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if oil is
still leaking.
• Oil seal damaged/worn • Check oil seals; replace if necessary
Possible malfunctions/remedy
Fault Possible cause Measure

Oil leaking • Too much oil • Check oil level, correct if necessary
• from gear unit • Drive not installed in proper • Install breather plug correctly and ad-
breather mounting position just the oil level
• Frequent cold starts (oil foaming) • Install oil expansion tank
and/or high oil level
Oil leaking • Seal not tight • Retighten screw
• from the screw plug • Fittings loosened • Retighten the fitting and screw
• from the oil drain
valve
Severe V-belt wear • Inadequately aligned belt pulleys • Check V-belt pulley alignment and pre-
tension of the belts
• Harmful ambient conditions (e.g. • Protect V-belt drive from environmental
abrasive particles, chemical sub- influences; sufficient ventilation must be
stances) ensured
• V-belt overloaded • Replace V-belt if necessary; contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE
No oil pump suction • Air in the suction line of the oil • Fill oil into the suction line and the oil
pump pump, vent the pump at the pressure
side
• Oil pump defective • Consult SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Pressure switch does • Air in the suction line of the oil • Fill the suction line and oil pump with oil
not switch pump • Vent the pump at the pressure side
• Pressure switch connected incor- • Check the connection
rectly
• Pressure switch defective • Replace pressure switch
• Oil pump defective • Consult SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Malfunction in the oil- • Malfunction of the oil-water or oil- • Observe the separate operating instruc-
water or oil-air cooling air cooling system tions for the oil-water or oil-air cooling
system system.
Gear unit does not • Thermostat set incorrectly • Check the setting of the thermostat
reach cold start temper-
• Oil heating defective or connec- • Check the oil heater for proper connec-
ature
ted incorrectly tion and function; replace if necessary
• Heat dissipation too great due to • Protect the gear unit from cooling off
unfavorable climatic conditions during the warm-up phase
Operating temperature • Damaged/defective backstop • Check the backstop, replace it if neces-
at backstop too high, no sary
blocking function
• Consult SEW‑EURODRIVE.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
1) During the run-in phase (24-hour runtime), it is normal for (small amounts of) oil/grease to leak from the oil seal (see also DIN 3761).
Malfunctions/remedy
Service 9
9.3 Service
Please have the following information available if you require customer service
assistance:
• Complete nameplate data
• Type and extent of the problem
• Time the problem occurred and any accompanying circumstances
• Assumed cause
• A digital photograph, if possible
9.4 Waste disposal

Dispose gear units in accordance with the regulations in force regarding respective
materials:
• Steel scrap
– Housing parts
– Gears
– Shafts
– Rolling bearing
• Collect waste oil and dispose of it according to the regulations in force.
22299017/EN – 10/2015
10 Address list
10 Address list
Algeria
Sales Algiers REDUCOM Sarl Tel. +213 21 8214-91
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoune Fax +213 21 8222-84
Bellevue http://www.reducom-dz.com
16200 El Harrach Alger info@reducom-dz.com
Argentina
Assembly Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Tel. +54 3327 4572-84
Sales Ruta Panamericana Km 37.5, Lote 35 Fax +54 3327 4572-21
(B1619IEA) Centro Industrial Garín http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Prov. de Buenos Aires sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Australia
Assembly Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 3 9933-1000
Sales 27 Beverage Drive Fax +61 3 9933-1003
Service Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 2 9725-9900
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park Fax +61 2 9725-9905
New South Wales, 2164 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Austria
Assembly Vienna SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0
Sales Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24 Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
Service A-1230 Wien http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Bangladesh
Sales Bangladesh SEW-EURODRIVE INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED Tel. +88 01729 097309
345 DIT Road salesdhaka@seweurodrivebangladesh.com
East Rampura
Dhaka-1219, Bangladesh
Belarus
Sales Minsk Foreign Enterprise Industrial Components Tel. +375 17 298 47 56 / 298 47 58
RybalkoStr. 26 Fax +375 17 298 47 54
BY-220033 Minsk http://www.sew.by
sales@sew.by
Belgium
Assembly Brussels SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 16 386-311
Sales Researchpark Haasrode 1060 Fax +32 16 386-336
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
BE-3001 Leuven info@sew-eurodrive.be
Service Competence Industrial SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 84 219-878
Center Gears Rue de Parc Industriel, 31 Fax +32 84 219-879
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
service-wallonie@sew-eurodrive.be
Brazil
Production São Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3835-8000
Sales Estrada Municipal José Rubim, 205 – Rodovia sew@sew.com.br
Service Santos Dumont Km 49
Indaiatuba – 13347-510 – SP
Assembly Rio Claro SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3522-3100
Sales Rodovia Washington Luiz, Km 172 Fax +55 19 3524-6653
Service Condomínio Industrial Conpark montadora.rc@sew.com.br
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Caixa Postal: 327

13501-600 – Rio Claro / SP
Joinville SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 47 3027-6886
Rua Dona Francisca, 12.346 – Pirabeiraba Fax +55 47 3027-6888
89239-270 – Joinville / SC filial.sc@sew.com.br
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH Tel. +359 2 9151160
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax +359 2 9151166
BG-1606 Sofia bever@bever.bg
Address list
10
Cameroon
is supported by Germany
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 905 791-1553
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax +1 905 791-2999
Service Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.watson@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 604 946-5535
Tilbury Industrial Park Fax +1 604 946-2513
7188 Honeyman Street b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 514 367-1124
2555 Rue Leger Fax +1 514 367-3677
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9 a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Chile
Assembly Santiago de SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA Tel. +56 2 2757 7000
Sales Chile Las Encinas 1295 Fax +56 2 2757 7001
Service Parque Industrial Valle Grande http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
LAMPA ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
RCH-Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 22 25322612
Assembly No. 78, 13th Avenue, TEDA Fax +86 22 25323273
Sales Tianjin 300457 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cn
Service info@sew-eurodrive.cn
Assembly Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 512 62581781
Sales 333, Suhong Middle Road Fax +86 512 62581783
Service Suzhou Industrial Park suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 20 82267890
No. 9, JunDa Road Fax +86 20 82267922
East Section of GETDD guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou 510530
Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 24 25382538
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 24 25382580
Shenyang Economic Technological Develop- shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
ment Area
Shenyang, 110141
Taiyuan SEW-EURODRIVE (Taiyuan) Co,. Ltd. Tel. +86-351-7117520
No.3, HuaZhang Street, Fax +86-351-7117522
TaiYuan Economic & Technical Development taiyuan@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
ShanXi, 030032
Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 27 84478388
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 27 84478389
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA wuhan@sew-eurodrive.cn
430056 Wuhan
Xi'An SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 29 68686262
No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road Fax +86 29 68686311
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development xian@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Sales Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. +852 36902200
Service Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax +852 36902211
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Hong Leong Industrial Complex contact@sew-eurodrive.hk

No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Colombia
Assembly Bogota SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. +57 1 54750-50
Sales Calle 22 No. 132-60 Fax +57 1 54750-44
Service Bodega 6, Manzana B http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
Santafé de Bogotá sew@sew-eurodrive.com.co
10 Address list
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 1 4613-158
Service Zeleni dol 10 Fax +385 1 4613-158
HR 10 000 Zagreb kompeks@inet.hr
Czech Republic
Assembly Hostivice SEW-EURODRIVE CZ s.r.o. Tel. +420 255 709 601
Sales Floriánova 2459 Fax +420 235 350 613
Service 253 01 Hostivice http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Drive Service +420 800 739 739 (800 SEW SEW) Service
Hotline / 24 Tel. +420 255 709 632
Hour Service Fax +420 235 358 218
servis@sew-eurodrive.cz
Denmark
Assembly Copenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. +45 43 95 8500
Sales Geminivej 28-30 Fax +45 43 9585-09
Service DK-2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Egypt
Sales Cairo Copam Egypt Tel. +202 44812673 / 79 (7 lines)
Service for Engineering & Agencies Fax +202 44812685
Building 10, Block 13005, First Industrial Zone, http://www.copam-egypt.com
Obour City Cairo copam@copam-egypt.com
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. +372 6593230
Reti tee 4 Fax +372 6593231
EE-75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa http://www.alas-kuul.ee
veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Finland
Assembly Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax +358 3 780-6211
Service FIN-15860 Hollola 2 http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Service Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Keskikankaantie 21 Fax +358 3 780-6211
FIN-15860 Hollola http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Production Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears Oy Tel. +358 201 589-300
Assembly Santasalonkatu 6, PL 8 Fax +358 201 589-310
FI-03620 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
France
Production Hagenau SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Sales 48-54 route de Soufflenheim Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
Service B. P. 20185 http://www.usocome.com
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex sew@usocome.com
Production Forbach SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Zone industrielle
Technopôle Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Brumath SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 37 48 48
1 rue de Bruxelles
22299017/EN – 10/2015
F-67670 Mommenheim
Assembly Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Sales Parc d'activités de Magellan Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Service 62 avenue de Magellan – B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Lyon SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Parc d'affaires Roosevelt Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Address list
10
France
Nantes SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Parc d’activités de la forêt Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
4 rue des Fontenelles
F-44140 Le Bignon
Paris SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Zone industrielle Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
2 rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Étang
Gabon
is supported by Germany.
Germany
Headquarters Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Production Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1970
Sales D-76646 Bruchsal http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Postfach 3023 – D-76642 Bruchsal
Production / Industrial Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Gears Christian-Pähr-Str. 10 Fax +49 7251 75-2970
D-76646 Bruchsal
Production Graben SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251-2970
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf
P.O. Box
Postfach 1220 – D-76671 Graben-Neudorf
Östringen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG, Werk Tel. +49 7253 9254-0
Östringen Fax +49 7253 9254-90
Franz-Gurk-Straße 2 oestringen@sew-eurodrive.de
D-76684 Östringen
Service Competence Mechanics / SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1710
Center Mechatronics Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251 75-1711
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf scc-mechanik@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1780
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1769
D-76646 Bruchsal scc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Technology North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 5137 8798-30
Center Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 Fax +49 5137 8798-55
D-30823 Garbsen (Hannover) dtc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 3764 7606-0
Dänkritzer Weg 1 Fax +49 3764 7606-30
D-08393 Meerane (Zwickau) dtc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 89 909552-10
Domagkstraße 5 Fax +49 89 909552-50
D-85551 Kirchheim (München) dtc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 2173 8507-30
Siemensstraße 1 Fax +49 2173 8507-55
D-40764 Langenfeld (Düsseldorf) dtc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Center Berlin SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 306331131-30
Alexander-Meißner-Straße 44 Fax +49 306331131-36
D-12526 Berlin dc-berlin@sew-eurodrive.de
Ludwigshafen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75 3759
c/o BASF SE Fax +49 7251 75 503759
Gebäude W130 Raum 101 dc-ludwigshafen@sew-eurodrive.de
D-67056 Ludwigshafen
Saarland SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 6831 48946 10
Gottlieb-Daimler-Straße 4 Fax +49 6831 48946 13
22299017/EN – 10/2015
D-66773 Schwalbach Saar – Hülzweiler dc-saarland@sew-eurodrive.de

Ulm SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7348 9885-0
Dieselstraße 18 Fax +49 7348 9885-90
D-89160 Dornstadt dc-ulm@sew-eurodrive.de
Würzburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 931 27886-60
Nürnbergerstraße 118 Fax +49 931 27886-66
D-97076 Würzburg-Lengfeld dc-wuerzburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service +49 800 SEWHELP
+49 800 7394357
10 Address list
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. +44 1924 893-855
Sales DeVilliers Way Fax +44 1924 893-702
Service Trident Park http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Normanton info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
West Yorkshire
WF6 1GX
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service Tel. 01924 896911
Greece
Sales Athens Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34
12, K. Mavromichali Street Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
P.O. Box 80136 http://www.boznos.gr
GR-18545 Piraeus info@boznos.gr
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06-58
Service Csillaghegyí út 13. Fax +36 1 437 06-50
H-1037 Budapest http://www.sew-eurodrive.hu
office@sew-eurodrive.hu
Iceland
Sales Reykjavik Varma & Vélaverk ehf. Tel. +354 585 1070
Knarrarvogi 4 Fax +354 585)1071
IS-104 Reykjavík http://www.varmaverk.is
vov@vov.is
India
Registered Office Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 265 3045200
Assembly Plot No. 4, GIDC Fax +91 265 3045300
Sales POR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243 http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
Service Gujarat salesvadodara@seweurodriveindia.com
Assembly Chennai SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 44 37188888
Sales Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II Fax +91 44 37188811
Service Mambakkam Village saleschennai@seweurodriveindia.com
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Pune SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 21 35 628700
Plant: Plot No. D236/1, Fax +91 21 35 628715
Chakan Industrial Area Phase- II, salespune@seweurodriveindia.com
Warale, Tal- Khed,
Pune-410501, Maharashtra
Indonesia
Sales Jakarta PT. Cahaya Sukses Abadi Tel. +62 21 65310599
Komplek Rukan Puri Mutiara Blok A no 99, Fax +62 21 65310600
Sunter csajkt@cbn.net.id
Jakarta 14350
Jakarta PT. Agrindo Putra Lestari Tel. +62 21 2921-8899
JL.Pantai Indah Selatan, Komplek Sentra In- Fax +62 21 2921-8988
dustri Terpadu, Pantai indah Kapuk Tahap III, aplindo@indosat.net.id
Blok E No. 27 http://www.aplindo.com
Jakarta 14470
Medan PT. Serumpun Indah Lestari Tel. +62 61 687 1221
Jl.Pulau Solor no. 8, Kawasan Industri Medan Fax +62 61 6871429 / +62 61 6871458 / +62
II 61 30008041
Medan 20252 sil@serumpunindah.com
serumpunindah@yahoo.com
http://www.serumpunindah.com
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Surabaya PT. TRIAGRI JAYA ABADI Tel. +62 31 5990128

Jl. Sukosemolo No. 63, Galaxi Bumi Permai Fax +62 31 5962666
G6 No. 11 sales@triagri.co.id
Surabaya 60111 http://www.triagri.co.id
Surabaya CV. Multi Mas Tel. +62 31 5458589
Jl. Raden Saleh 43A Kav. 18 Fax +62 31 5317220
Surabaya 60174 sianhwa@sby.centrin.net.id
http://www.cvmultimas.com
Address list
10
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. +353 1 830-6277
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax +353 1 830-6458
Dublin Industrial Estate http://www.alperton.ie
Glasnevin, Dublin 11 info@alperton.ie
Israel
Sales Tel Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Tel. +972 3 5599511
Ahofer Str 34B / 228 Fax +972 3 5599512
58858 Holon http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Italy
Assembly Solaro SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. +39 02 96 9801
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax +39 02 96 79 97 81
Service I-20020 Solaro (Milano) http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
Ivory Coast
Sales Abidjan SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +225 21 21 81 05
Ivory Coast Fax +225 21 25 30 47
Rue des Pècheurs, Zone 3 info@sew-eurodrive.ci
26 BP 916 Abidjan 26 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ci
Japan
Assembly Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. +81 538 373811
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax +81 538 373814
Service Iwata http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Shizuoka 438-0818 sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
hamamatsu@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Kazakhstan
Sales Almaty SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +7 (727) 350 5156
291-291A, Tole bi street Fax +7 (727) 350 5156
050031, Almaty http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
sew@sew-eurodrive.kz
Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411

Representative office in Uzbekistan Fax +998 71 2359412
96A, Sharaf Rashidov street, http://www.sew-eurodrive.uz
Tashkent, 100084 sew@sew-eurodrive.uz
Ulaanbaatar SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +976-77109997
Representative office in Mongolia Fax +976-77109997
Suite 407, Tushig Centre http://www.sew-eurodrive.mn
Seoul street 23, sew@sew-eurodrive.mn
Sukhbaatar district,
Ulaanbaatar 14250
Kenya
is supported by Tanzania
Latvia
Sales Riga SIA Alas-Kuul Tel. +371 6 7139253
Katlakalna 11C Fax +371 6 7139386
LV-1073 Riga http://www.alas-kuul.lv
info@alas-kuul.com
Lebanon
Sales (Lebanon) Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl Tel. +961 1 510 532
B. P. 80484 Fax +961 1 494 971
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut ssacar@inco.com.lb

Sales (Jordan, Kuwait , Beirut Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore) Tel. +961 1 494 786
Saudi Arabia, Syria) Sin El Fil. Fax +961 1 494 971
B. P. 55-378 http://www.medrives.com
Beirut info@medrives.com
10 Address list
Lithuania
Sales Alytus UAB Irseva Tel. +370 315 79204
Statybininku 106C Fax +370 315 56175
LT-63431 Alytus http://www.irseva.lt
irmantas@irseva.lt
Luxembourg
Assembly Brussels SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 16 386-311
Sales Researchpark Haasrode 1060 Fax +32 16 386-336
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.lu
BE-3001 Leuven info@sew-eurodrive.be
Macedonia
Sales Skopje Boznos DOOEL Tel. +389 23256553
Dime Anicin 2A/7A Fax +389 23256554
1000 Skopje http://www.boznos.mk
Madagascar
Sales Antananarivo Ocean Trade Tel. +261 20 2330303
BP21bis. Andraharo Fax +261 20 2330330
Antananarivo oceantrabp@moov.mg
101 Madagascar
Malaysia
Assembly Johor SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. +60 7 3549409
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax +60 7 3541404
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
West Malaysia
Mexiko
Assembly Quéretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO SA DE CV Tel. +52 442 1030-300
Sales SEM-981118-M93 Fax +52 442 1030-301
Service Tequisquiapan No. 102 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Parque Industrial Quéretaro scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
C.P. 76220
Quéretaro, México
Mongolia
Technical Office Ulaanbaatar SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +976-77109997
Representative office in Mongolia Fax +976-77109997
Suite 407, Tushig Centre http://www.sew-eurodrive.mn
Seoul street 23, sew@sew-eurodrive.mn
Sukhbaatar district,
Ulaanbaatar 14250
Morocco
Sales Mohammedia SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +212 523 32 27 80/81
Service 2 bis, Rue Al Jahid Fax +212 523 32 27 89
28810 Mohammedia http://www.sew-eurodrive.ma
sew@sew-eurodrive.ma
Namibia
Sales Swakopmund DB Mining & Industrial Services Tel. +264 64 462 738
Einstein Street Fax +264 64 462 734
Strauss Industrial Park anton@dbminingnam.com
Unit1
Swakopmund
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam SEW-EURODRIVE B.V. Tel. +31 10 4463-700
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 4155-552

Service NL-3044 AS Rotterdam Service: 0800-SEWHELP
Postbus 10085 http://www.sew-eurodrive.nl
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam info@sew-eurodrive.nl
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 9 2745627
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax +64 9 2740165
Service 82 Greenmount drive http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
East Tamaki Auckland sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Address list
10
New Zealand
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 3 384-6251
30 Lodestar Avenue, Wigram Fax +64 3 384-6455
Christchurch sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Nigeria
Sales Lagos Greenpeg Nig. Ltd Tel. +234-701-821-9200-1
Plot 296A, Adeyemo Akapo Str. Omole GRA http://www.greenpegltd.com
Ikeja Lagos-Nigeria bolaji.adekunle@greenpegltd.com
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax +47 69 24 10 40
Service N-1599 Moss http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Pakistan
Sales Karachi Industrial Power Drives Tel. +92 21 452 9369
Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Com- Fax +92-21-454 7365
mercial Area, seweurodrive@cyber.net.pk
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Paraguay
Sales Fernando de la SEW-EURODRIVE PARAGUAY S.R.L Tel. +595 991 519695
Mora De la Victoria 112, Esquina nueva Asunción Fax +595 21 3285539
Departamento Central sewpy@sew-eurodrive.com.py
Fernando de la Mora, Barrio Bernardino
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW EURODRIVE DEL PERU S.A.C. Tel. +51 1 3495280
Sales Los Calderos, 120-124 Fax +51 1 3493002
Service Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Philippines
Sales Makati P.T. Cerna Corporation Tel. +63 2 519 6214
4137 Ponte St., Brgy. Sta. Cruz Fax +63 2 890 2802
Makati City 1205 mech_drive_sys@ptcerna.com
http://www.ptcerna.com
Poland
Assembly Łódź SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. +48 42 293 00 00
Sales ul. Techniczna 5 Fax +48 42 293 00 49
Service PL-92-518 Łódź http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Service Tel. +48 42 293 0030 24 Hour Service
Fax +48 42 293 0043 Tel. +48 602 739 739 (+48 602 SEW SEW)
serwis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. +351 231 20 9670
Sales Av. da Fonte Nova, n.º 86 Fax +351 231 20 3685
Service P-3050-379 Mealhada http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Romania
Sales Bucharest Sialco Trading SRL Tel. +40 21 230-1328
Service str. Brazilia nr. 36 Fax +40 21 230-7170
011783 Bucuresti sialco@sialco.ro
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Russia
Assembly St. Petersburg ЗАО «СЕВ-ЕВРОДРАЙФ» Tel. +7 812 3332522 / +7 812 5357142
Sales а. я. 36 Fax +7 812 3332523
Service 195220 Санкт-Петербург http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Sambia
is supported by South Africa.
10 Address list
Senegal
Sales Dakar SENEMECA Tel. +221 338 494 770
Mécanique Générale Fax +221 338 494 771
Km 8, Route de Rufisque http://www.senemeca.com
B.P. 3251, Dakar senemeca@senemeca.sn
Serbia
Sales Belgrade DIPAR d.o.o. Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288 0393
Ustanicka 128a Fax +381 11 347 1337
PC Košum, IV floor office@dipar.rs
SRB-11000 Beograd
Singapore
Assembly Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. +65 68621701
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax +65 68612827
Service Jurong Industrial Estate http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Singapore 638644 sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Slovakia
Sales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel.+421 2 33595 202, 217, 201
Rybničná 40 Fax +421 2 33595 200
SK-831 06 Bratislava http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Košice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 55 671 2245
Slovenská ulica 26 Fax +421 55 671 2254
SK-040 01 Košice Mobile +421 907 671 976
sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. +386 3 490 83-20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax +386 3 490 83-21
SLO - 3000 Celje pakman@siol.net
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 11 248-7000
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 248-7289
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads http://www.sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2 info@sew.co.za
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552-9820
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552-9830
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens bgriffiths@sew.co.za
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 902 3815
48 Prospecton Road Fax +27 31 902 3826
Isipingo cdejager@sew.co.za
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Nelspruit SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 13 752-8007
7 Christie Crescent Fax +27 13 752-8008
Vintonia robermeyer@sew.co.za
P.O.Box 1942
Nelspruit 1200
South Korea
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Assembly Ansan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 31 492-8051

Sales 7, Dangjaengi-ro, Fax +82 31 492-8056
Service Danwon-gu, http://www.sew-eurodrive.kr
Ansan-si, Gyeonggi-do, Zip 425-839 master.korea@sew-eurodrive.com
Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 51 832-0204
28, Noksansandan 262-ro 50beon-gil, Fax +82 51 832-0230
Gangseo-gu,
Busan, Zip 618-820
Address list
10
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. +34 94 43184-70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 Fax +34 94 43184-71
Service E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Sri Lanka
Sales Colombo SM International (Pte) Ltd Tel. +94 1 2584887
254, Galle Raod Fax +94 1 2582981
Colombo 4, Sri Lanka
Swaziland
Sales Manzini C G Trading Co. (Pty) Ltd Tel. +268 2 518 6343
PO Box 2960 Fax +268 2 518 5033
Manzini M200 engineering@cgtrading.co.sz
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. +46 36 34 42 00
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax +46 36 34 42 80
Service S-553 03 Jönköping http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-550 03 Jönköping jonkoping@sew.se
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. +41 61 417 1717
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax +41 61 417 1700
Service CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Taiwan
Sales Taipei Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 2 27383535
6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2 Fax +886 2 27368268
Tung Huw S. Road Telex 27 245
Taipei sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Nan Tou Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 49 255353
No. 55 Kung Yeh N. Road Fax +886 49 257878
Industrial District sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
Nan Tou 540 http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Tanzania
Sales Daressalam SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LIMITED TANZANIA Tel. +255 0 22 277 5780
Plot 52, Regent Estate Fax +255 0 22 277 5788
PO Box 106274 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
Dar Es Salaam central.mailbox@sew.co.tz
Thailand
Assembly Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. +66 38 454281
Sales 700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Fax +66 38 454288
Service Muang sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
Chonburi 20000
Tunisia
Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Zone Industrielle Mghira 2 Fax +216 79 40 88 66
Lot No. 39 http://www.tms.com.tn
2082 Fouchana tms@tms.com.tn
Turkey
Assembly Kocaeli-Gebze SEW-EURODRİVE Hareket Tel. +90 262 9991000 04
Sales Sistemleri San. Ve TIC. Ltd. Sti Fax +90 262 9991009
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Service Gebze Organize Sanayi Böl. 400 Sok No. 401 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
41480 Gebze Kocaeli sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr
Ukraine
Assembly Dnipropetrovsk ООО «СЕВ-Евродрайв» Tel. +380 56 370 3211
Sales ул. Рабочая, 23-B, офис 409 Fax +380 56 372 2078
Service 49008 Днепропетровск http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
10 Address list
United Arab Emirates

Sales Sharjah Copam Middle East (FZC) Tel. +971 6 5578-488
Service Sharjah Airport International Free Zone Fax +971 6 5578-499
P.O. Box 120709 copam_me@eim.ae
Sharjah
Uruguay
Assembly Montevideo SEW-EURODRIVE Uruguay, S. A. Tel. +598 2 21181-89
Sales Jose Serrato 3569 Esqina Corumbe Fax +598 2 21181-90
CP 12000 Montevideo sewuy@sew-eurodrive.com.uy
USA
Production Southeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 864 439-7537
Assembly Region 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Production +1 864 439-9948
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly Northeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 856 467-2277
Sales Region Pureland Ind. Complex Fax +1 856 845-3179
Service 2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 937 335-0036
Region 2001 West Main Street Fax +1 937 332-0038
Troy, Ohio 45373 cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 214 330-4824
Region 3950 Platinum Way Fax +1 214 330-4724
Dallas, Texas 75237 csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 510 487-3560
Region 30599 San Antonio St. Fax +1 510 487-6433
Hayward, CA 94544 cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Additional addresses for service provided on request!
Uzbekistan
Technical Office Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411
Representative office in Uzbekistan Fax +998 71 2359412
96A, Sharaf Rashidov street, http://www.sew-eurodrive.uz
Tashkent, 100084 sew@sew-eurodrive.uz
Vietnam
Sales Ho Chi Minh Nam Trung Co., Ltd Tel. +84 8 8301026
City Huế - South Vietnam / Construction Materials Fax +84 8 8392223
250 Binh Duong Avenue, Thu Dau Mot Town, khanh-nguyen@namtrung.com.vn
Binh Duong Province http://www.namtrung.com.vn
HCM office: 91 Tran Minh Quyen Street
District 10, Ho Chi Minh City
Hanoi MICO LTD Tel. +84 4 39386666
Quảng Trị - North Vietnam / All sectors except Fax +84 4 3938 6888
Construction Materials nam_ph@micogroup.com.vn
8th Floor, Ocean Park Building, 01 Dao Duy http://www.micogroup.com.vn
Anh St, Ha Noi, Viet Nam
22299017/EN – 10/2015
Index
Index
A E
Accessories ......................................................... 34 Embedded safety notes......................................... 8
Accessories, abbreviations.................................. 34 ET ........................................................................ 68
Agitator housing Exclusion of liability ............................................... 9
Drywell sealing system................................. 236 Exterior corrosion protection ............................... 28
Housings ........................................................ 52 F
Shaft end pump .............................................. 72
Transport ........................................................ 23 Fan ...................................................................... 82
Agitator housing, lubrication points ..................... 63 Installation .................................................... 184
Maintenance................................................. 237
B
X.F.. fan (standard) ........................................ 82
Backstop X.K.. Advanced (option) ................................. 83
Maintenance intervals .................................. 216 Fan cooling .......................................................... 82
Structure......................................................... 77 Fixed pivoted mounting position
Base frame .................................................. 81, 183 Checking the oil level ................................... 223
Bearing grease .................................................. 267 Definition ........................................................ 43
C Flange couplings with cylindrical interference fit 108
Dimensions of the machine shaft ................. 108
Change of mounting position............................. 211 Disassembly ................................................. 112
Check the oil consistency .................................. 227 Installation .................................................... 109
Checking and cleaning the venting. .................. 233 Foundation .......................................................... 97
Checking the oil level ........................................ 220
G
Notes on the procedure for fixed and variable
pivoted mounting positions........................... 223 Gear unit mounting .............................................. 96
Procedure for gear units with oil expansion tank. Gear unit venting ................................................. 67
222
Gearing and shafts .............................................. 55
Standard procedure...................................... 220
Grease............................................................... 267
Circulation cooling ............................................... 82
Grease nipple on gear unit cover ........................ 62
Clockwise rotation ............................................... 77
Coating systems .................................................. 65 H
Combination overview of agitator housing options ... Hazard symbols
55
Meaning............................................................ 8
Cooling types....................................................... 82
Horizontal housing /HH
Copyright notice .................................................... 9
Description ..................................................... 50
Counterclockwise rotation ................................... 77
Housing design
Couplings .......................................................... 159
Horizontal housing /HH .................................. 50
Mounting tolerance....................................... 159
Universal housing /HU.................................... 51
Customer service .............................................. 271
I
22299017/EN – 10/15
D
IEC .............................................................. 78, 168
Direction of rotation dependencies ...................... 47
Input shaft............................................................ 56
Drywell sealing system ........................................ 64
Inspection intervals............................................ 216
DUO10A diagnostic unit ...................................... 91
Internal conservation ........................................... 28
Dust protection lip................................................ 61
Index
L Mounting surface ................................................. 37
Labels on the gear unit ........................................ 12 N

Labyrinth seal ...................................................... 61 Nameplate ........................................................... 30
Lubricant change intervals ................................ 219 NEMA .......................................................... 78, 168
Lubricant fill quantities for mounting position M1 ..... Notes
255, 265
Designation in the documentation .................... 7
Lubricant fill quantities for mounting position M3 .....
Meaning of the hazard symbols ....................... 8
257
NTB ..................................................................... 90
Lubricant fill quantities for mounting position M5 .....
266 NTB temperature switch ...................................... 90
Lubricant table ................................................... 253 Dimensions................................................... 205
Lubricants .......................................................... 252 Electrical connection .................................... 205
Lubrication ........................................................... 66 Technical data .............................................. 205
Lubrication points ................................................ 62 O
Lubrication types ................................................. 66
Oil bath lubrication............................................... 66
M Oil change ......................................................... 228
Maintenance intervals ....................................... 216 Oil dipstick ........................................................... 67
Malfunction Oil drain plug ....................................................... 67
Ambient temperature.................................... 269 Oil drain valve...................................................... 67
Backstop....................................................... 270 Oil expansion tank
Cold start temperature.................................. 270 Filling with oil ................................................ 100
Oil cooling system ........................................ 270 Installation .................................................... 100
Oil drain leaking............................................ 270 Position........................................................... 68
Oil leakage ................................................... 269 Structure......................................................... 68
Oil leaking..................................................... 269 Oil fill for pressure lubrication ............................ 101
Oil pump ....................................................... 270 Oil heater
Pressure switch ............................................ 270 Electrical connection .................................... 197
Temperature of the bearing.......................... 269 Maintenance................................................. 249
V-belt wear ................................................... 270 Note on the function ..................................... 195
Venting ......................................................... 270 Startup.......................................................... 211
Malfunctions ...................................................... 269 Structure......................................................... 89
Motor adapter Thermostat ................................................... 196
Design .......................................................... 168 Oil level glass ...................................................... 67
Installation .................................................... 161 Oil seal ................................................................ 61
Structure......................................................... 78 Oil temperature
Motor pump Limit temperature for gear unit startup ......... 192
Mechanical connection................................. 184 Oil heater
Startup.......................................................... 209 Malfunctions ................................................. 269
Structure......................................................... 74 Oil-air collingwith pressure lubrication
22299017/EN – 10/15
Mounting flange Malfunctions ................................................. 269

Installation .................................................... 158 Oil-air cooler for pressure lubrication
Structure......................................................... 76 Maintenance................................................. 249
Mounting position ................................................ 35 Mechanical connection................................. 191
Mounting position and standard mounting surface... Structure......................................................... 88
39
Index
Oil-air cooler for splash lubrication Startup.......................................................... 209

Inspection ..................................................... 249 Technical data .............................................. 203
Structure......................................................... 88 PT100 .......................................................... 90, 204
Oil-air cooler with motor pump for pressure lubrica- PT100 temperature sensor
tion Dimensions................................................... 204
Startup.......................................................... 211 Electrical connection .................................... 204
Oil-air cooler with motor pump for splash lubrication
R
Startup.......................................................... 211
Oil-water cooler for pressure lubrication Refilling sealing grease ..................................... 234
Maintenance................................................. 249 Rights to claim under limited warranty .................. 8
Mechanical installation ................................. 191 Rigid flange coupling
Structure......................................................... 88 Disassembly ......................................... 112, 120
Oil-water cooler for splash lubrication Mounting onto shaft.............................. 109, 116
Cooling medium ........................................... 185 Mounting the flange connection ........... 110, 118
Maintenance................................................. 248 Structure......................................................... 75
Mechanical connection................................. 191 Rigid flange couplings with keyway
Structure......................................................... 88 Dimensions of the machine shaft ................. 116
Oil-water cooler with motor pump for pressure lub- Disassembly ................................................. 120
rication Installation .................................................... 116
Startup.......................................................... 211
S
Oil-water cooler with motor pump for splash lubrica-
tion Safety notes ........................................................ 10
Startup.......................................................... 211 Designation in the documentation .................... 7
Oil-water cooling with pressure lubrication Meaning of the hazard symbols ....................... 8
Malfunctions ................................................. 269 Structure of embedded..................................... 8
OS1, OS2, OS3 ................................................... 65 Structure of the section-related ........................ 7
Output shaft ......................................................... 56 Safety symbols on the dimension sheet .............. 17
Output shaft as hollow shaft with keyway Sealing grease .................................................. 267
Installation .................................................... 122 Sealing systems .................................................. 61
Structure......................................................... 59 Section-related safety notes .................................. 7
Output shaft as hollow shaft with shrink disk SEP ..................................................................... 71
Installation .................................................... 134 Shaft end pump
Structure......................................................... 59 Filling with oil ................................................ 101
Overview of housing designs and options ........... 53 Position........................................................... 72
OWC.................................................................... 88 Startup.......................................................... 209
P Structure......................................................... 71
Shaft position....................................................... 38
Packaging............................................................ 28
Shrink disk
Pivoted mounting position
Installation .................................................... 134
Checking the oil level ................................... 223
Structure......................................................... 59
22299017/EN – 10/15
Definition ........................................................ 42

Shutting down gear units ................................... 213
Preliminary work .................................................. 95
Signal words in the safety notes............................ 7
Pressure lubrication..................................... 66, 101
Splash lubrication ................................................ 66
Pressure switch
Splined hollow shaft as output shaft
Dimensions................................................... 203
Installation .................................................... 149
Electrical connection .................................... 203
Structure......................................................... 60
Index
Splined solid shafts ............................................. 58 V

Split housing ...................................................... 250
Variable pivoted mounting position
Starting up the gear unit at low ambient temperat-
ures .............................................................. 213 Checking the oil level ................................... 223
Storage conditions......................................... 28, 29 Definition ........................................................ 44
Swing base ........................................................ 183 V-belt drive
Structure......................................................... 80 Max. permitted motor weight ........................ 169
Symbols on the gear unit..................................... 12 Vbelt drives
Malfunctions ................................................. 269
T
V-belt drives
Taconite............................................................... 61 Installation .................................................... 169
Temperature Structure......................................................... 79
Limit temperature for gear unit startup ......... 192 Visual oil level check ........................................... 67
Temperature sensor PT100 ................................ 90 W
Technical data .............................................. 204
Thermal housing Warning notes on the gear unit ........................... 12
Housings ........................................................ 52 Waste disposal .................................................. 271
Transport ........................................................ 22 Waste oil............................................................ 271
Tightening torques Water cooling cartridge
Gear unit mounting of foot-mounted design ... 96 Cleaning ....................................................... 246
Of mount-on components for gear units......... 97 Connecting ................................................... 186
Tolerances........................................................... 92 Disassembly ................................................. 247
Torque arm Installation .................................................... 186
Installation .................................................... 155 Interior cleaning............................................ 248
Structure......................................................... 74 Maintenance................................................. 246
Transport ............................................................. 19 Maintenance intervals .................................. 246
Transport conditions ............................................ 28 Removal ....................................................... 187
TSK ..................................................................... 90 Requirements on the water quality............... 187
TSK temperature switch ...................................... 90 Startup.................................................. 209, 210
Dimensions................................................... 206 Structure......................................................... 86
Electrical connection .................................... 206 Types of cooling water ................................. 190
Technical data .............................................. 206 Water cooling catridge
Type designation of the gear unit ........................ 31 Malfunction ................................................... 269
Type designation of the oil supply system..... 32, 33 Water cooling cover
Connection ..................................................... 85
U
Disassembly ................................................. 244
Universal housing /HU Installation .................................................... 184
Description ..................................................... 51 Maintenance................................................. 244
Malfunctions ................................................. 269
Removal ....................................................... 185
22299017/EN – 10/15
Structure......................................................... 85
SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

P.O. Box 3023
76642 BRUCHSAL
GERMANY
Phone +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com

Operatin Instructions 22299017

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operatin Instructions 22299017

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operatin Instructions 22299017

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *22299017_1015*

Assembly and Operating

Industrial Gear Units

Edition 10/2015 22299017/EN

2 Safety notes ............................................................................................................................ 10

3 Basic gear unit structure ....................................................................................................... 30

4 Design of options and accessories ...................................................................................... 68

4.3 Motor pump /ONP ......................................................................................................... 74

4.9 V-belt drives /VBD......................................................................................................... 79

5.23 Water cooling cover /CCV........................................................................................... 184

5.30 Oil heater .................................................................................................................... 194

6 Startup ................................................................................................................................... 208

7.18 Oil-water cooler for pressure lubrication /OWP........................................................... 249

8 Lubricants ............................................................................................................................. 252

8.1 Lubricant selection ...................................................................................................... 252

10 Address list ........................................................................................................................... 272

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 283

1.2 Structure of the safety notes

Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded

1.2.2 Structure of section-related safety notes

Meaning of the hazard symbols

Hazard symbol Meaning

Warning of dangerous electrical voltage

Warning of hot surfaces

Warning of risk of crushing

Warning of suspended load

Warning of automatic restart

1.2.3 Structure of embedded safety notes

1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty

1.5 Copyright notice

2.1 Preliminary remark

Refer to the documentation for additional information.

2.4 Designated use

2.5 Other applicable documentation

• Operating instructions of the options installed, if required.

2.6 Safety symbols on the gear unit

Safety symbols Meaning

Indicates the oil dipstick.

Indicates the oil level glass.

Indicates the oil sight glass.

Indicates the oil filling location. Also serves as proper venting

Indicates the oil drain.

Indicates the position of the breather. Serves to avoid mistaking

Indicates the positions for relubrication and makes it easier to

Indicates the water supply and serves to locate the connection

Indicates the water return and serves to locate the connection

Indicates the position of the temperature sensor/temperature

Helps avoid errors caused by lack of understanding. Read the in-

For pivoted mounting positions, this symbol on the information

Caution: Risk of burns caused by hot surface.

Caution: Removing the dipstick during operation may result in

Caution: Risk of burns due to hot gear oil.

VORSICHT NOTICE ATTENTION PRECAUCIÓN VOORZICHTIG OSTROŻNIE

The coupling is supplied without grease.

VORSICHT NOTICE ATTENTION PRECAUCIÓN VOORZICHTIG OSTROŻNIE

VORSICHT NOTICE ATTENTION PRECAUCIÓN VOORZICHTIG OSTROŻNIE

The gear unit is protected against corrosion with VCI.

VORSICHT NOTICE ATTENTION PRECAUCIÓN VOORZICHTIG OSTROŻNIE

F Réducteur protégé contre la ES Reductor está protegido con VCI

VORSICHT NOTICE ATTENTION PRECAUCIÓN VOORZICHTIG OSTROŻNIE

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services 22299017_1015